JP2015221123A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To make it possible to recognize an occurrence of one event even if accumulations of one event makes another event occur, and impresses the occurrence of the other event deeper.SOLUTION: Let us assume that an AT game is started in a state where the net increased number in the AT is 999 tokens and middle bells are won. When stop switches are operated and the middle stage bells are won, as a regulation number reached display 304 by a liquid crystal display 51, "OVER 1000 tokens!!" is displayed. Game players can simultaneously recognize that the net increased number has reached the regulation number as well as an occurrence of pay-out. Also, efficiently, by only making a notification that the net increased number has reached the regulation number, the fact that the net increased number has reached the regulation number can be impressed deeper.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and multiple types of identification information are variably displayed when the game medium wins in a start prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area. There are pachinko machines in which a predetermined number of bets are set and a slot machine in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) are variably displayed when a start operation is performed. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute variable display of identification information in this way, when the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a predetermined display result in the variable display unit, a predetermined game value (for example, jackpot) Some are configured to give the player a transition to a state, etc.).

  As a technology related to this type of gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of replay is increased, and the winning probability of bonuses and small roles is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as normal time, and the player at the replay time There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (a net increase) obtained by (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Also, for example, a slot machine is known that displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small role is won at a replay time that ends when a fixed number of medals are paid out (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2008-6223 A (for example, paragraph [0070]) JP 2009-5971 A (for example, paragraph [0225], paragraph [0331], etc.)

  By the way, in the gaming machines described in Patent Literature 1 and Patent Literature 2, when a medal is paid out, the medal payout number and the net increase number are informed to notify that one event of medal payout has occurred. It will also be that. Then, if the occurrence of one event satisfies the predetermined condition and another event different from the one event occurs, the player will be notified if each event is separately reported. Since it is difficult to recognize each notification at the same time, there is a possibility that the player's recognition for the notification may be hindered.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and even when another event occurs due to the accumulation of one event, it can be recognized that one event has occurred, An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can more impress the occurrence of other events.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention is:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment),
The first event (for example, the payout of medals in the first embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the first embodiment, winning a small role), and the occurrence of the first event is accumulated. And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the first embodiment, the net increase in medals reaches a specified number) can occur,
A first notification effect executing means for executing a first notification effect for notifying that the first event has occurred (for example, in the first embodiment, the portion performing the process of Sq5 in FIG. 21);
A second notification effect executing means for executing a second notification effect for notifying that the second event has occurred (for example, in the first embodiment, the portion performing the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21);
When the first event occurs and the second event also occurs, the gaming machine does not execute the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit, but performs the second notification effect by the second notification effect execution unit. (For example, in the first embodiment, the part that performs the process of Sq4 when Y is Sq3 in FIG. 21)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the second event occurs, the occurrence of the first event also accompanies. Therefore, by notifying that the second event has occurred by executing the second notification effect, the player is notified of the second event. The occurrence of the first event can be recognized simultaneously with the occurrence. Moreover, it can be made more impressive that the second event has occurred by notifying only that the second event has occurred efficiently.

Game medium detecting means (for example, inserted medal sensor 31 in modification 4) for detecting the inserted game medium (for example, medal in modification 4);
A gaming value (for example, a credit counter which is a credit value in the modified example 4) that can be used for setting the betting number in accordance with a betting operation (for example, an operation on the MAXBET switch 6 in the modified example 4) is stored. Game value storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in the modified example 4),
Bet number storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in modification 4) for storing the bet number set for one game (for example, the value of the BET counter in modification 4); ,
Depending on the detection result by the game medium detecting means (for example, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in Modification 4), the betting number stored in the betting number storage means and the gaming value storage means Game medium detection time update means for updating any one of the stored game values (for example, in Modification 4, in S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41),
When the re-game winning (for example, replay in the fourth modification, the first to second replays) occurs (for example, in the fourth modification, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the gaming value is increased. Re-game derivation update means for updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means so that the next game can be started without using it (for example, in Modification 4, S14 in FIGS. 39 to 41, S15).
According to this feature, the next game can be started without using the game value by generating a re-game winning.

The first event is that an advantageous amount advantageous to the player (for example, the number of medals to be paid out) is given,
The second event is characterized in that the total amount (for example, net increase) of the advantageous amount given to the player becomes a predetermined amount (for example, a specified number).
According to this feature, it can be more impressive that the second event related to the advantageous amount advantageous to the player has occurred.

The second notification effect executing means is characterized by executing the second notification effect by displaying on the display device (for example, the liquid crystal display 51) that the second event has occurred.
According to this feature, it can be more impressive that the second event has occurred.

Advantageous period control means (for example, in Modified Example 1) for controlling to an advantageous period (for example, AT in Modified Example 1) where the expected value of gaming value given to the player is higher than the gaming value used by the player , The part controlled by the AT in the process of FIG.
When the control of the advantageous period is started, the net increase counting means (for example, in the first modification, starts counting the net increase obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player from the game value given to the player. 20), and
A notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying that the net increase counted by the net increase counting means has reached one specified number (for example, in the first modification, the portion performing the processing of FIG. 28). ,
The acquisition number counting means ends the counting of the acquisition number when the advantageous period is not reached and the advantageous period is not controlled again until the predetermined period elapses (for example, in the first modification, FIG. The process that ends when 50 games have passed since the end of AT),
When the number of acquisitions counted by the acquisition number counting means reaches one specified number, the gaming machine falls below one specified number, falls below one specified number, and then reaches one specified number again. There is further provided restriction means for restricting the execution of the notification effect until the counting of the net increase by the pure increase counting means is completed (for example, in the modified example 1, the portion in which Sh6 processing is not performed when Y is Sh4 in FIG. 28). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the advantageous period is again controllable by the time the advantageous period ends and the predetermined period elapses, the notification effect is performed again for the specified number of notification effects once performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being impressed that the gaming value has decreased after the advantageous period has ended.

Acquisition number counting means for counting the number of acquisitions of the player's gaming value during the advantageous period (for example, in the first modification, the part performing the processing of FIG. 20);
A specific effect that can execute a specific effect in a mode different from the notification effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the first variation, the cherry is won and controlled by the AT, and the AT is within the remaining 5 games). Execution means (for example, in the first modification, the part that performs the processing of FIG. 29),
When the execution of the notification effect overlaps with the execution of the specific effect, the notification effect execution means does not execute the notification effect, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect. When an event in which the gaming value increases later occurs and the number of acquisitions counted by the acquisition number counting unit has reached one specified number, the notification effect execution unit executes the notification effect (for example, Modification 1). In FIG. 28, when Sh5 is Y, Sh6 processing is not performed, and when Sh5 is N, Sh6 processing is performed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when an event that increases the gaming value occurs does not collapse, so the player does not feel uncomfortable. So that the game can proceed.

  The number of game values acquired is both the number of game values given to the player and the number of game values obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player from the game value given to the player. including.

  In addition, the overlap between the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect includes both the case where the notification effect overlaps and the case where the notification effect overlaps in all periods. In addition, “when the notification effect execution and the specific effect execution overlap” means, in other words, that the notification effect execution timing and the specific effect execution timing are at the same time. In this case, the start of execution does not necessarily have to be the same, and includes a case where at least a part of the execution periods of both effects is the same period.

Acquisition number counting means for counting the number of acquisitions of the player's gaming value during the advantageous period (for example, the part performing the processing of FIG. 20 in Modification 2),
A specific effect execution means (for example, in Modification 2 in FIG. 31, which can execute a specific effect different from the notification effect when a predetermined condition (for example, the addition condition shown in Sj3 of FIG. 25 in Modification 2) is satisfied). A portion for performing the processing of Sr6 shown),
When the execution of the notification effect overlaps with the execution of the specific effect, the specific effect execution means does not execute the specific effect, the notification effect execution means executes the notification effect, and the notification effect execution means performs the notification effect. When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the execution, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect (for example, in Modification 2, when Sr5 in FIG. 31 is Y, the process of Sr6 is not performed, and when Sr5 is N Is the part that performs Sr6 processing)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the specific effect is changed, the flow that the specific effect is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied does not break down, so that the game proceeds so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. can do.

  The number of game values acquired is both the number of game values given to the player and the number of game values obtained by subtracting the game value used by the player from the game value given to the player. including.

  In addition, the overlap between the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect includes both the case where the notification effect overlaps and the case where the notification effect overlaps in all periods. In addition, “when the notification effect execution and the specific effect execution overlap” means, in other words, that the notification effect execution timing and the specific effect execution timing are at the same time. In this case, the start of execution does not necessarily have to be the same, and includes a case where at least a part of the execution periods of both effects is the same period.

An advantageous event obtained by the player (for example, in the third modification, the medal acquisition number (medal net increase), the medal payout number, the number of digested games since the start of AT) is a predetermined occurrence number (for example, in the third modification, When a specific game history (for example, a game history in which the number of medals obtained after starting AT is a predetermined number in Modified Example 3) becomes 100, 250, 500, 1000,. (E.g., in the third modification, a bonus granting means capable of granting an AT continuation winning for the number of additional games, a bonus winning for a predetermined number of games, and a distribution of a premier effect for a predetermined number of distributions) For example, in Modification 3, the processes of steps Sd9, Se3, and Se4 executed by the sub-control unit 91 in FIG. 33 and FIG.
By executing a specific display (for example, the number notification effects 502 and 521 in FIG. 38 in Modification 3) indicating that the specific game history has been reached, a game history notification for notifying that the specific game history has been obtained. Means (for example, the processes of steps Sd14 to Sd17, Sf1, and Sf3 executed by the sub-control unit 91 in FIG. 35 and FIG. 37 in Modification 3);
Bonus amount display (for example, in the second modification, the additional notification effects 504, 506, 510 in the modified example 2) indicating the amount of privilege (for example, the number of additional games, the number of predetermined games, the number of predetermined distributions) as the amount of the given privilege. 523), privilege grant notification means for notifying that the privilege has been granted (for example, in Modification 3, steps Sd14 to Sd17, Sf6 executed by the sub-control unit 91 in FIGS. 35 and 37) , Sf7 processing)
The privilege grant notification means changes the specific display executed by the game history notification means to the privilege amount display when the bonus is granted in the specific game history (for example, a modified example) 3, the privilege amount display is executed using a partial destruction pattern, a full destruction pattern, a zoom pattern, a shuffle pattern, and a character change pattern effect pattern in FIG. 38 (for example, in the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 determines which Execute the continuous winning notification effect of the production pattern)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that the privilege is granted by executing the privilege amount display in a display mode in which the specific display is changed to the privilege amount display when the privilege is given in the specific game history. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a privilege has been given by becoming a specific game history rather than a slot machine that does not execute the privilege amount display in a display mode in which the specific display is changed to the privilege amount display.

Game medium detecting means (for example, inserted medal sensor 31 in modification 4) for detecting the inserted game medium (for example, medal in modification 4);
A gaming value (for example, a credit counter which is a credit value in the modified example 4) that can be used for setting the betting number in accordance with a betting operation (for example, an operation on the MAXBET switch 6 in the modified example 4) is stored. Game value storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in the modified example 4),
Bet number storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in modification 4) for storing the bet number set for one game (for example, the value of the BET counter in modification 4); ,
Depending on the detection result by the game medium detecting means (for example, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in Modification 4), the betting number stored in the betting number storage means and the gaming value storage means Game medium detection time update means for updating any one of the stored game values (for example, in Modification 4, in S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41),
When the re-game display result (for example, replay in the fourth modification, first to second replays) is derived (for example, in the fourth modification, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the game Re-game derivation updating means for updating the betting number stored in the betting number storage means so that the next game can be started without using the value (for example, in the fourth modification, in FIG. 39 to FIG. 41 S14, S15),
After the replay display result is derived, delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until the release condition is satisfied (for example, in the fourth modification, FIGS. 39 to 41). S13) in
The release condition is satisfied when the detection result by the game medium detection means becomes a release result (detected by a specific sensor) (for example, in Modification 4, S91 in FIG. 42)
The game medium detection time update means includes:
The game medium is detected by the game medium detection means after the game is finished without deriving the re-game display result, so that the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is a predetermined upper limit number. (3) When the number is less than, the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated, and when the upper limit is reached, the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means is updated. Game medium detection time update means (for example, in Modification 4, S33 to S35 in FIGS. 39 to 41),
After the re-game display result has been derived, the game medium detection means after the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated by the re-game derivation updating means and the next game can be started. When the game medium is detected by the second game medium detection update means for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means (for example, in modification 4, S40 of FIG. 40 in FIG. 39). In addition to the processes of S10 to S12, after the bet number setting is completed and after it is determined that credit is possible in S19, the process is executed after S21 (see FIG. 43C). Including.
According to this feature, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is updated by the re-game deriving update means and the next game can be started. With the detected game medium, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the betting amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, after the re-game display result is derived, delay control is performed, and the game medium is inserted, and the detection result by the game medium detection means becomes the release result, so that the delay control is released. As a result, even when the bet number is updated by deriving the replay display result for the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem that the next game can be started.

  The upper limit number may be a predetermined number, may be a single number, or may be a number determined according to the gaming state being controlled. Further, the upper limit number may be the same as the predetermined number at which the game can be started, or may be larger than the predetermined number.

  The game medium whose game value can be updated after the re-game display result is derived is updated by the re-game deriving time update means, and the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated. Any game medium detected after the game can be started may be used. For example, the next game can be started by updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage unit by the re-game derivation update unit. May be a game medium detected after a predetermined condition (e.g., elapse of a predetermined period, completion of a predetermined process) is established after the time has elapsed ([permissible timing of insertion / settlement after replay winning) ] (See (b)).

  The detection result of the game medium detection means that updates either the number of bets or the game value by the game medium detection update means (hereinafter also referred to as update result) and the release result that satisfies the release condition are input As long as it is a detection result of the detection means for detecting the played game medium, the detection result of the same detection means may be used, and the release result is the same as the detection means for determining whether or not the update result is obtained. The detection result of the detection means, the detection result of a part of the detection means (specific sensors) of the plurality of detection means (multiple sensors) for determining whether or not the update result has been obtained, or the update result It may be a detection result of a detection means (a special sensor not involved in the update result) different from the detection means for determining whether or not.

Game medium detecting means (for example, inserted medal sensor 31 in modification 4) for detecting the inserted game medium (for example, medal in modification 4);
A gaming value that can be used for setting the number of bets in accordance with a betting operation (for example, an operation to the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 in the fourth modification) (for example, the credit value in the fourth modification) A game value storage means for storing (credit counter) (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in the modified example 4);
Bet number storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in modification 4) for storing the bet number set for one game (for example, the value of the BET counter in modification 4); ,
Depending on the detection result by the game medium detecting means (for example, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in Modification 4), the betting number stored in the betting number storage means and the gaming value storage means Game medium detection time update means for updating any one of the stored game values (for example, in Modification 4, in S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41),
When the re-game display result (for example, replay in the fourth modification, first to second replays) is derived (for example, in the fourth modification, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the game Re-game derivation updating means for updating the betting number stored in the betting number storage means so that the next game can be started without using the value (for example, in the fourth modification, in FIG. 39 to FIG. 41 S14, S15),
After the replay display result is derived, delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until the release condition is satisfied (for example, in the fourth modification, FIGS. 39 to 41). S13) in
The release condition is satisfied when the detection result by the game medium detection means becomes a release result (detected by a specific sensor) (for example, in Modification 4, S91 in FIG. 42)
The game medium detection time update means includes:
The game medium is detected by the game medium detection means after the game is finished without deriving the re-game display result, so that the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is a predetermined upper limit number. (3) When the number is less than, the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated, and when the upper limit is reached, the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means is updated. Game medium detection time update means (for example, in Modification 4, S33 to S35 in FIGS. 39 to 41),
After the re-game display result is derived, the game medium is detected by the game medium detection means after the re-game derivation update means starts updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means. Thus, the second game medium detection update means for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means (for example, see FIG. 44 in the fourth modification, [allowing for insertion / settlement after replay winning) (See Timing section))).
According to this feature, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is a game medium detected after the update of the betting number by the re-game deriving update means is started. Thus, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the betting amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, after the re-game display result is derived, delay control is performed, and the game medium is inserted, and the detection result by the game medium detection means becomes the release result, so that the delay control is released. As a result, even when the bet number is updated by deriving the replay display result for the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem that the next game can be started.

  The upper limit number may be a predetermined number, may be a single number, or may be a number determined according to the gaming state being controlled. Further, the upper limit number may be the same as the predetermined number at which the game can be started, or may be larger than the predetermined number.

  The game media whose game value can be updated after the re-game display result is derived will be updated after the re-game derivation update unit starts updating the bet amount stored in the bet number storage unit. Any detected game medium may be used. For example, a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined period of time, completion of predetermined processing) after the update of the betting number stored in the betting number storage unit is started by the re-game derivation update unit. Etc.) (for example, in the fourth modification, see FIG. 44, see the “permitted / settlement permitted timing after replay winning” column).

  The detection result of the game medium detection means that updates either the number of bets or the game value by the game medium detection update means (hereinafter also referred to as update result) and the release result that satisfies the release condition are input As long as it is a detection result of the detection means for detecting the played game medium, the detection result of the same detection means may be used, and the release result is the same as the detection means for determining whether or not the update result is obtained. The detection result of the detection means, the detection result of a part of the detection means (specific sensors) of the plurality of detection means (multiple sensors) for determining whether or not the update result has been obtained, or the update result It may be a detection result of a detection means (a special sensor not involved in the update result) different from the detection means for determining whether or not.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (main) which a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (main) which a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which a main control part performs after a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which a main control part performs for every fixed interval. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of special combination (bonus), the symbol combination of a special combination, and a special combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the kind of small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and a small combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of replay, the symbol combination of replay, and the technical matter relevant to replay. It is a figure for demonstrating the technical matter relevant to the symbol combination of a transfer event, and a transfer event. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state and transition of RT. It is a figure for demonstrating the navigation object combination in AT. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several re-game player winning. It is a figure for demonstrating the reel control at the time of several small part winning. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which a sub control part performs for every fixed interval. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the pure increase count process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the notification effect execution process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the notification effect execution process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the AT game number addition lottery process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the notification effect execution process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the alerting | reporting effect execution process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous effect execution process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in the modification 1. In the modification 2, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the notification effect execution process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of an extra effect execution process executed by a sub control unit in a timer interrupt process (sub) in Modification Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the presence or absence of execution of alerting | reporting effect, and the transition of the net increase of a medal in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example in the case of restrict | limiting a notification effect in the modification 1. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example in the case of restricting a specific effect in Modification 2. In the modification 3, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which a sub control part performs. In the modification 3, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the AT continuous lottery process which a sub control part performs. In the modification 3, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production pattern selection process which a sub-control part performs. (A) in modification 3 is a diagram showing an example of the number notification effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a continuous destruction notification effect of a partially destroyed pattern, (C) is a continuous winning of a destruction pattern. The figure which shows an example of alerting | reporting effect, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the continuous winning alerting | reporting effect after completion | finish of all the effects. In the modification 4, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. In the modification 4, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. In the modification 4, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which a main control part performs. In the modification 4, it is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reply freeze process which a main control part performs. FIG. 16 is a diagram for describing timing at which medal insertion or settlement is allowed after the game is over in Modification 4. FIG. 16 is a diagram for describing timing at which medal insertion or settlement is allowed after the game is over in Modification 4. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the modification 5. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure in the main board | substrate with which the pachinko game machine in the modification 5 is provided.

[About the first embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described.

[Slot machine configuration example]
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing 1a. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 2, inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided from a see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Arranged to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “plum”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3 provided in the approximate center of the reel panel 1c of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  At the position corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The front door 1b uses a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value). MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any game state in this embodiment) out of a prescribed number of bets determined according to the game state, stored as credits Settlement switch 10 that is operated when the medal used for setting the number of medals and the bet is set (to return the medals used for setting the credit and the number of bets), start that is operated when starting the game Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of the switch 7, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the effect switch for use in the effect. 56 are respectively provided so as to be operated by the player.

  In this embodiment, among the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, the stop is the first stop, and the stop operation is the first stop reel. This is referred to as one stop operation (or first stop). Similarly, the reel that stops second is referred to as a second stop reel, the stop is referred to as a second stop, and the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation (or second stop). The reel that stops third is referred to as a third stop reel, the stop is referred to as a third stop or final stop, and the stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation (or third stop).

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, and the like. Game assist indicator 12, 1BETLED14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 by lighting, 2BETLED15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 and 2 that the bet number is set by 3 3BET LED 16 to notify, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted by lighting, start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (the previous game start) Waiting for the start of reel rotation because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the bet amount by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided inside the 8R to notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid by lighting. It has been.

  Further, below the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the front door 1b, a lower panel 1d on which a title of the slot machine 1 and a payout table 1 to be described later are printed is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. The set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, and the validity / invalidity of the stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of the BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) A check switch 36a for selecting the automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement at the end of BB, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation). An automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 are provided in a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a. ) Side or the medal payout exit 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R described above is provided inside the housing 1a. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front side of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state. There are provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 that is operated when the power is turned on / off. .

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN becomes valid when three cards are determined as the specified number of bets regardless of the gaming state and the specified number of bets are set. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the middle stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the middle stage of the reel 2R, that is, the middle stage, is the winning line. It is defined as. In the present embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  In the present embodiment, invalid lines LM1 to LM1-4 are set separately from the winning line LN in order to make it easier to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of symbols aligned with the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of symbols constituting a specific prize is arranged on the winning line LN, the invalid line LM1 to LM4. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) is awarded when the winning line LN is aligned with any of the LM1 to LM4, the symbols constituting the particular winning line LN It is easy to recognize that the combination is complete. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the invalid lines LM1 and 2L of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM1 and the reel 2L set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction on the upper stage. The lower stage, the lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, lower right There are four types of invalid lines LM3 set across straddling symbols: invalid line LM3, lower stage of reel 2L, middle stage of reel 2C, upper stage of reel 2R, that is, invalid line LM4 set across straddling symbols. It is defined as LM.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a combination of symbols (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) predetermined on the winning line LN is a display result of each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. In the case of a stop, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the winning line LN, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. Further, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (milliseconds).

  The reels 2L, 2C and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the maximum of 4 symbols is drawn in 190 ms. Will be able to. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is used. Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. Can be displayed on the winning line LN.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. In addition, a command transmission line from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, which will be described later, and a power supply line for supplying power from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via a single cable and connector. Are connected to each other, and all the connectors that connect these cables and the respective boards are connected to each other so that the respective parts on the side of the effect control board 90 can operate and receive commands from the main control part 41. Become. For this reason, unless the command transmission line for transmitting a command from the main control unit 41 is connected to the effect control board 90, power is not supplied to the effect control board 90, and only the effect control board 90 side operates. There is no end to it.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, insertion medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Detection signals from these connected switches are input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a random number generation circuit 42, a sampling circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, a power interruption detection circuit 48, and a reset circuit 49. Is installed.

  The main control unit 41 is configured by a one-chip microcomputer and includes a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 executes a control program stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random value (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating the value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a software random number function). .

  The switch detection circuit 44 takes in detection signals input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits them to the main control unit 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a voltage drop is detected. The reset circuit 49 provides a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 executes processing for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 by executing the program read from the ROM.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41, the CPU 41a executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 41b, so that the main control unit 41 (or CPU 41a) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 41a executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the game control board 40.

  The RAM 41c included in the main control unit 41 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, all areas of the RAM 41c are backup RAMs, and all the contents of the RAM 41c are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the slot machine is stopped.

  The ROM 41a included in the main control unit 41 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 41b stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 41a to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 41b stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 41a to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the game control board 40.

  The RAM 41c included in the main control unit 41 is provided with a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 and the like. For example, a DRAM is used as the RAM 41c, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a has a built-in refresh register for performing this refresh operation. For example, the refresh register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b. Accordingly, the stored value in the refresh register is updated every execution time of one instruction in the CPU 41a.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. A command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the sub control unit 91 toward the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 receives the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the input port. The main control unit 41 executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection states of various switches input from these input ports.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main) described later is executed at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time required to complete the repetition of the process depending on the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main) Therefore, the process that is repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is completed at least once.

  The main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during the execution of the interrupt process, and when a plurality of interrupts occur at the same time, the main control unit 41 prioritizes according to a predetermined order. An interrupt to be executed is set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process ends, a new interrupt occurs at that point. It will be.

  An effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), an effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above, which are arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 performs output control of effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55. However, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the effect device is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board separately from the sub control part 91, and the sub control part 91 is based on a command from the main control part 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED55 are illustrated as an effect device, an effect device is not restricted to these, For example, it drives mechanically. A display device or a mechanically driven item may be applied as the rendering device.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a and a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90 are detected. Switch detection circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub CPU 91a, and other circuits Etc., and the sub CPU 91a receives various commands sent from the game control board 40 to perform various controls for producing effects, and controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control directly or indirectly.

  The reset circuit 95 has a lower voltage for releasing the reset signal than the reset circuit 49 that gives the system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. When the power is turned on, the sub control unit 91 It starts at an earlier stage than the unit 41. On the other hand, the power interruption detection circuit 98 has a voltage that outputs a voltage drop signal lower than the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. The sub control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires a command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Execute command reception interrupt processing to be stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes an interrupt process (sub), which will be described later, by generating an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  Also, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even when the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when an interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the same time, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 91c is stored for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, all areas of the RAM 91c are backup RAMs, and all the contents of the RAM 91c are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the slot machine is stopped. In the present embodiment, all areas of the RAM 91c are backup RAMs, and all the contents of the RAM 91c are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the slot machine is stopped.

[Settings]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In order to check the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the state in which the game can proceed is returned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. When a power failure determination process is performed and it is determined that a voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, a power interruption process (main) is executed. In the power interruption process (main), the RAM 41c stores destructive diagnosis data (5AH in the present embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored, and all areas of the RAM 41c are stored. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the stored data becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. Note that the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in the present embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The main control unit 41 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation regardless of whether the system reset or the user reset, and the value of the data for destructive diagnosis And the processing state of the main control unit 41 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the value of the data for destructive diagnosis is also correct. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destruction diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state. However, the progress of the game is disabled. Unlike the normal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change state described above. It will not be released until

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 41c is retained by the backup power source even during a power failure, and the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. In this case, the configuration is such that the control state before power interruption is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. It may be configured to return to the control state before power interruption based on the data backed up at the time of input.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power interruption when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power interruption, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player For example, it is not necessary to restore the state of all input ports to the state before power interruption.

[About initialization]
Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a non-saved work, a general work, a special work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  Important work items include various indicators, LED display data, I / O input / output data, game time counters, and other data that can be inconvenient to initialize, as well as the RT flag and RT remaining game count described below. Work to be done. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a game state flag described later. The special work is a work that stores data such as various software random numbers that are initialized only before the setting is started. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored, and the unused stack area is one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, if it is established, it will be initialized, but the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 stores the data in the RAM 41c at startup when the setting key switch 37 is on, when a RAM error occurs, at the end of the BB, and at startup when the setting key switch 37 is off. When is not destroyed, when the five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initializations that are initialized in accordance with each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and transitions to a setting change state, or initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the storage area of the RAM 41c, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the important work and the used stack area, that is, the area from the unsaved work to the unused stack area are initialized. The Initialization 2 is an initialization performed at the end of the BB. In the initialization 2, there are general work, unused area, and unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, that is, areas from the general work to the unused stack area. It is initialized. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is off at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. In initialization 3, non-saved work, unused areas, and The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 is performed before the transition to the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the transition to the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. May be.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a RAM abnormality error occurs at the time of power-on or the like, initialization 1 is executed, and the control state before that is initialized. The RT flag and the RT remaining game number assigned to the work are held without being initialized. On the other hand, the gaming state flag assigned to the general work is initialized as initialization 1 is executed.

[About internal lottery]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the prescribed number of bets that can be set is determined according to the gaming state (usually inside, BB (RB)), and is determined according to the gaming state. The game can be started on condition that the specified number of bets is set. In the present embodiment, the winning line LN is activated when a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the winning line LN that is activated (hereinafter, the activated winning line LN is simply referred to as the winning line LN). A winning combination will be awarded when a combination of symbols called “comb” is complete. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) and a special combination (hereinafter also referred to as “bonus”) accompanied by a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination in the RAM. Note that, hereinafter, “re-playing combination” and “replay” collectively refer to various replays shown in FIG. 12 and FIG.

  Of the winning flags for each of these roles, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random value for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired when the start switch 7 is detected. Specifically, the value of the random number value storage work assigned to the RAM 41c is set to the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the value of the gaming state flag for specifying the gaming state, and the RT described later are specified. The determination is made according to the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the value of the RT flag, the number of bets, and the set value. Note that the special role carryover means that if the special role is not won in the internal lottery game and the special role is not won, the special role will be carried over from the next game until the special role is won. It is to maintain the winning state.

  In the internal lottery, an internal lottery target, the current gaming state flag value, the RT flag value, and the number of determination values determined corresponding to the set value are stored in a random number for internal lottery (a lottery work). When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For this reason, a winning combination will be won with a probability (number of determination values / 65536) according to the number of determination values.

  If a winning combination of any combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

[Reel stop control]
Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R executed in the reel rotation process in Sd3 of FIG. 7 will be described.

  The main control unit 41 refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. A stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table of each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel is described. To explain, when any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thus, the region corresponding to the region number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the region corresponding to the region number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the fluoroscopic window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 frames after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn into the winning line LN to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the winning combination is drawn so that it does not align with the winning line LN. Create a stop control table with the number of sliding symbols and perform reel stop control. On the other hand, if you do not win any of the roles, stop control with the number of sliding symbols that does not match any of the roles Create a table and perform reel stop control. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped in the winning line LN within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  If a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, the elected small role will be placed in the winning line LN within 4 frames. The number of sliding symbols is set so as to be pulled in as much as possible, and for the stop operation position where the selected small role cannot be drawn into the winning line LN within the range of up to 4 frames, the winning special role is set to 4 in the winning line LN. A stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within the range of frames is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the small roles that have been selected in the winning line LN within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If it is not possible to withdraw a small role that has been won in the draw range of up to 4 frames to the line LN, if the special role that has been won in the draw range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line LN, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the small role with the winning line LN over the special role, and the special role can be won only when the small role cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the small combination is drawn and the small combination is not aligned with the winning line LN at the same time as the special combination.

  In this embodiment, when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are won simultaneously, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. If the winning combination is prioritized over the winning special role, the special role is controlled to align with the winning line LN only when the winning combination cannot be drawn. When the two are simultaneously elected, the control for aligning the special role with the winning line LN has priority over the small role, and the control for aligning the small role with the winning line LN may be performed only when the special role cannot be drawn. .

  When a special role and replay are won at the same time, such as when a re-playing role is won in a state where the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, when the stop operation is performed, the maximum is shown in the winning line LN. Control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. In this case, the symbols constituting the re-gamer or the symbols constituting the re-gamer elected at the same time are arranged within 5 symbols for each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, that is, at intervals of 4 frames or less. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected at the same time, the timing of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Without fail, the re-playing role will always be won. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games with the winning line LN has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in and the special combination is not aligned with the winning line LN at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 rotates the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started. And the control for stopping the display result on the corresponding reel is performed on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In the present embodiment, the control for stopping the display result on the corresponding reel is performed on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, but the rotation of the reel is started. Then, when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. Anyway. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described.

[Startup processing (main)]
When the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main control unit 41 performs a startup process (main) shown in the flowcharts of FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control unit 41 first initializes the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. (Sa2), and then initializes the values of the I register and IY register. (Sa3). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa4), and RAM parities of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c are calculated (Sa5).

  In step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the RAM parity calculated in step Sa5 is zero. If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa6, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. In this case, after executing the initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas except the used stack area and the important work among the storage areas of the RAM 41c (Sa22), whether or not the setting key switch 37 is turned on. If the setting key switch 37 is ON, a setting change start command indicating that the setting is being changed is generated (Sa19), and the generated setting change start command is stored in the command buffer (Sa20). ), The timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 at regular intervals (0.56 ms interval). Allow write (Sa21), the setting change processing for such change of winning probability of winning, that is, the transition to the setting change state. Then, when the setting change process ends, the process proceeds to the game process shown in FIG.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in step Sa23, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa24), an error start command indicating a RAM abnormality is generated (Sa25), and the generated error start command is used as a command. The data is stored in the buffer (Sa26), and the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 at regular intervals (0.56 ms interval) is permitted (Sa27). , Error processing, that is, shifts to a RAM abnormal error state. Then, for example, when the RAM abnormality error state is canceled by operating the reset / setting switch 38 by a game store clerk, the game processing shown in FIG. 7 is started.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa6, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa7). If the power interruption process (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set, and if the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa7 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored when power is interrupted) In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so the process proceeds to step Sa22 to execute initialization 1, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned on in step Sa23. For example, the processing of Sa19 to Sa21 described above is performed, and the setting change processing, that is, the setting change state is entered. If the setting key switch 37 is off in the step of Sa27, the above-described processing of Sa24 to Sa27 is performed, and the process proceeds to error processing, that is, a RAM abnormal error state. Then, when the RAM abnormal error state is canceled, the game processing shown in FIG. 7 is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sa7 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Therefore, the destructive diagnosis data is cleared (Sa8), and the unsaved work, unused area, and unreserved area in the RAM 41c are cleared. After performing initialization 3 to initialize the used stack area (Sa9), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on (Sa10). If the setting key switch 37 is on, initialization 1 is executed. (Sa15), the processing of Sa19 to Sa21 described above is performed, and the process shifts to the setting change process, that is, the setting change state. Then, when the setting change process ends, the process proceeds to the game process shown in FIG.

  If the setting key switch 37 is OFF in the step of Sa10, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, stored in the stack (Sa11), and the power interruption return 1 command (see FIG. 8) is generated. And stored in the command buffer (Sa12). Next, a power interruption return 2 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa13). Next, the power interruption recovery 3 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa14). Next, the power interruption return 4 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa15). Next, a hot start command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa16). Then, the main control unit 41 described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 permits the interruption of the timer interruption process (main) executed at a constant interval (interval of 0.56 ms) (Sa17). Return to the process that was being executed. If any of the processes in the game process shown in FIG. 7 has been performed before the power interruption, the process of Sd1 to Sd6 of the game process is performed based on the value of the program counter (PC) returned in Sa11. Returning to the processing that was performed before the power interruption. Also, for example, if any of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 has been performed before power interruption, based on the value of the program counter (PC) restored in Sa11, Of the processes of the timer interrupt process Sk1 to Sk26, the process returns to the process performed before power interruption.

[About various commands]
Next, commands that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 will be described. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub-control unit 91 includes 1-byte mode data indicating the type of command and 1-byte EXT data indicating the content of the command. The sub-control unit 91 determines the type of command from the mode data, and determines the content of the command from the EXT data.

  Each command is temporarily stored in a command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and a command transmission process (main) executed in the timer interrupt process (main) shown in FIGS. In Sk16), it is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  When the sub-control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 displays the image displayed from the liquid crystal display 51, the sound output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the front door according to the type of the received command. Control of the lamp etc. provided in 1b is performed.

  The setting change start command is a command indicating that setting change has been started. The setting change start command is transmitted at the start of setting change. In the EXT data, a value indicating that the setting change has been started is set.

  The setting change end command is a command indicating that the setting change has been completed and the setting value selected by the setting change. The setting change end command is transmitted when the setting change ends. In the EXT data, any one of six types of setting values selected by changing the setting is set.

  The error start command is a command indicating that an error has occurred. One of eight types of errors is set in the EXT data. The error start command is transmitted at the start of error processing. The eight types of errors include overflow tank overflow error indicating that the medal in the overflow tank 35 is full, no payout medal error indicating that there are no medals in the hopper tank 34a, and the payout medal is the hopper tank. 34a, a payout medal clogging error indicating that it is clogged, a medal selector abnormal error indicating that a medal detection error has occurred, a reel rotation error error indicating that the reel is not rotating normally, An illegal winning error indicating that the winning prediction flag expected to win based on the result of the internal lottery and the actual winning result does not coincide with each other, and an RWM content error indicating RAM abnormality are set.

  The error release command is a command indicating that the error has been released. The error cancel command is sent when error processing is cancelled. In the EXT data, a value indicating that the error has been canceled is set.

  The settlement start command is a command indicating that the medal settlement has started. The checkout start command is transmitted at the start of the checkout process. In the EXT data, either data indicating that the inserted medal has been settled or data indicating that the credited medal has been settled is set.

  The settlement end command is a command indicating that the medal settlement has ended. The settlement end command is transmitted at the end of the settlement process. In the EXT data, a value indicating that the settlement has been completed is set.

  The medal insertion command is a command indicating that a medal has been inserted. The medal insertion command is transmitted when a medal is inserted without credit addition. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of inserted medals (one to three) is set.

  The credit increase command is a command indicating that the number of credited medals has increased. The credit increase command is transmitted when a medal with credit addition is inserted. In the EXT data, a value indicating that the credit has increased is set.

  The game counter 1 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127 that is counted every time a game is played. The game counter 1 command is transmitted when the operation of the start switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating any one of the count values from 0 to 127 is set.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command indicating that reel rotation has started. The reel acceleration information command is transmitted when the start switch operation is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating one of nine types of reel rotation start patterns is set.

  The internal winning command is a command indicating whether or not BB is won and the state of RT. The internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch operation is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not BB is won and a state of RT is set.

  The winning number command is a command indicating the result of the internal lottery. The winning number command is transmitted when the start switch operation is accepted. A value indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the EXT data.

  The BB inserted number 1 command is a command indicating the number of medals inserted in the BB game. The BB inserted number 1 command is transmitted at the start of reel rotation. A value indicating the number of inserted medals is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop acceptance 1 command is a command indicating that the first stop has been performed. The reel stop acceptance 1 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the reception state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not it has been operated) and the lighting state of the LED incorporated in each stop switch (whether or not it is lit) are set.

  The reel sliding frame number 1 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the first stop is performed. The reel sliding frame number 1 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel stops is set.

  The reel stop position 1 command is a command indicating a position where the reel stops when the first stop is performed. The reel stop position 1 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is accepted. A value indicating the reel stop position (frame number 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop acceptance 2 command is a command indicating that the second stop has been performed. The reel stop acceptance 2 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the reception state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not it has been operated) and the lighting state of the LED incorporated in each stop switch (whether or not it is lit) are set.

  The reel sliding frame number 2 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the second stop is performed. The reel sliding frame number 2 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel stops is set.

  The reel stop position 2 command is a command indicating a position where the reel stops when the second stop is performed. The reel stop position 2 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is accepted. A value indicating the reel stop position (frame number 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop acceptance 3 command is a command indicating that the third stop has been performed. The reel stop acceptance 3 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the reception state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not it has been operated) and the lighting state of the LED incorporated in each stop switch (whether or not it is lit) are set.

  The reel sliding frame number 3 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the third stop is performed. The reel sliding frame number 3 command is transmitted when the operation of the stop switch is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel stops is set.

  The reel stop position 3 command is a command indicating a position where the reel stops when the third stop is performed. The reel stop position 3 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is accepted. A value indicating the reel stop position (frame number 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The game counter 2 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127 that is counted each time a game is played. The game counter 2 command is transmitted after all reels are stopped. In the EXT data, a value indicating any one of the count values from 0 to 127 is set.

  The RT information 2 command is a command indicating whether or not BB is won and the state of RT. The RT information 2 command is transmitted when the start switch operation is accepted. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not BB is won and a state of RT is set.

  The winning number 1 command is a command indicating the type of winning. The winning number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. In the EXT data, a value indicating the operating state of the BB (whether or not BB is in progress) and the type of winning is set.

  The winning number 2 command is a command indicating the type of winning. The winning number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. In the EXT data, a value indicating the operating state of the BB (whether or not BB is in progress) and the type of winning is set.

  The winning number command is a command indicating the number of medals to be paid out by winning. The winning number command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. A value indicating the number of medals paid out is set in the EXT data.

  The BB payout number 1 command is a command indicating the payout number of medals during BB. The BB payout number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process during BB. In the EXT data, a value (upper 7 bits) indicating a payout number of medals in BB is set.

  The BB payout number 2 command is a command indicating the payout number of medals during BB. The BB payout number 2 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process during BB. In the EXT data, a value (lower 7 bits) indicating the number of medals paid out in BB is set.

  The BB end wait command is a command indicating that BB end is waiting. The BB end wait command is transmitted when the BB ends. In the EXT data, a value indicating the type of BB waiting for termination (one type in this embodiment) is set.

  The BB end command is a command indicating that BB ends. The BB end command is transmitted at the end of BB, at the start of automatic checkout, and at the start of stop processing. In the EXT data, a value indicating the type of BB to be terminated (one type in the present embodiment) is set.

  The RT information 1 command is a command indicating an RT state. The RT information 1 command is transmitted at the end of the game. A value indicating the state of RT is set in the EXT data.

  The BB operation type command is a command indicating whether or not BB is in progress. The BB operation type command is transmitted at the end of the game. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not BB is in progress is set.

  The game end command is a command indicating a game state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is ended. The game end command is transmitted at the end of the game. In the EXT data, a value indicating a gaming state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is finished is set.

  The door command is a command indicating whether or not the front door 1b is opened. The door command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the setting change starts, when the RWM content error starts, when the game ends, or when the door is opened or closed. In the EXT data, a value indicating the door open state (whether open or closed) is set.

  The power interruption return 1 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127 that is counted every time the game is played. The power interruption return 1 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating any one of the count values from 0 to 127 is set.

  The power interruption return 2 command is a command indicating whether or not BB has been won and the state of RT. The power interruption recovery 2 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not BB is won and a state of RT is set.

  The power interruption return 3 command is a command indicating whether or not BB is in progress and the number of inserted medals. The power failure recovery 3 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether the BB is in progress and the number of inserted medals is set.

  The power interruption return 4 command is a command indicating a gaming state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is finished. The power interruption recovery 4 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating a gaming state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is finished is set.

  The hot start command is a command indicating that restart is performed without turning off the power. The hot start command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating that restart is performed without turning off the power is set.

[Game processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the main control unit 41.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6). ) Are executed in order, and when the game end process is completed, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. .

  In the internal lottery process in the step of Sd2, whether or not winning is awarded to each of the above-described winning combinations based on the internal lottery random value latched simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sd1 (ie, display) A process for determining whether or not to permit the derivation of the result is performed. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results. When a special combination (BB or RB) is won by internal lottery, a special combination carry-over flag is set. Then, as described above, the presence / absence of the special role carry-over flag is determined to determine the presence / absence of the special role, and the winning combination corresponding to the presence / absence of the carry-over (the special role is excluded from the internal lottery during the special role carry-over) Determination processing is performed.

  In the reel rotation process in the step Sd3, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated in response to the operation of the stop switch 7, the result of the internal lottery in the step Sd2, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player Processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is executed in response to the detected operation.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed. If the special combination wins, the special combination carry-over flag is cleared in this process.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  In the game process, a command is generated according to the progress control of the game, set in the command buffer, and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

[Timer interrupt processing (main)]
FIGS. 8 and 9 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit 41 by interrupting and executing the activation process and the game process at regular intervals (0.56 ms interval). Note that other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (main).

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, in the timer interrupt process (main), first, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sk1).

  Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sk2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48. If a voltage drop signal is input, whether or not the voltage drop signal is input in the previous power failure determination process as well. If a voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that is set.

  After the power failure determination process in the step of Sk2, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (Sk3). If the power interruption flag is not set, the process proceeds to Sk4 and the power interruption flag is set In this case, the process proceeds to a power interruption process (main).

  In step Sk4, port input processing for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port is performed.

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sk5). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt 1 is a branch process during a timer interrupt that controls the motor to control the start of the reel. Specifically, the processes from Sk9 to Sk11, such as a reel start process described later. Is done. Timer interrupt 2 is branch processing during timer interrupt that performs LED display control, time counter update, door open / close status monitoring, control signal output control, command and external output signal update, etc. Specifically, the processes of Sk12 to Sk17 such as the LED dynamic display process described later are performed. The timer interrupt 3 is a branching process during timer interrupt that detects the origin passage of the reel, monitors the switch input, and reads out the random number value. Processing of Sk20 to Sk22 such as time processing is performed. The timer interrupt 4 is a branching process during a timer interrupt that detects the input of a stop switch and performs reel stop control. Specifically, the processes of Sk23 to Sk25, such as a stop switch process described later. Is done. In the step of Sk5, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sk6). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk10 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk24 described later is executed (Sk7).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sk8). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, the reel motor Reel starting process (Sk9) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sk10) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, motor phase signal standby processing (Sk11) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk25.

  In the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sk8, LED dynamic display processing (Sk12) for dynamically lighting various indicators, and output processing of control signals and the like for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port (Sk13), a time counter update process (Sk14) for updating various time counters, a door monitoring process (Sk15) for monitoring the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, a door command transmission request, etc., set in the command buffer A command transmission process (Sk16) for transmitting various commands such as a setting change command, a return command, and an error command to the sub-control unit 91 and an external output signal update process (Sk17) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, and then Sk25. Go to step.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sk6, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for branching whether it is 3, that is, timer interrupt 4 (Sk18). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, if it is timer interrupt 3, the passing of the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (pass of the reel reference position) is checked, and the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected and stopped. Check if the preparation is complete (whether the stop preparation completion code is set). If the stop preparation is complete and the motor is rotating at a constant speed, operate the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. Whether or not there has been a change in the detection state of switches such as pass-through origin processing (Sk20) to be validated, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R First, switch input determination processing (Sk21) for making a transmission request for an operation detection command, etc., and random number reading processing (Sk22) for reading numerical data from the random value register R1D and storing it in the random value storage work are sequentially executed. Go to step.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sk18, the stop stored in the work on the stop reel is stored when the stop operation position is stored in the work on the stop reel in accordance with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The stop position is determined from the operation position, the stop switch process (Sk23) for calculating the number of steps after which the stop should be performed, and the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted. A stop process (Sk24) for starting braking by two-phase excitation and a final stop process (Sk25) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of braking in the stop process are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step Sk26.

  In the step of Sk26, the register saved in the stack area in Sk1 is restored, and the processing before the interruption is returned.

[About the types of winning combinations and combinations of winning combinations]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined symbol combination is aligned on the winning line LN, a winning is achieved. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the gaming status, but can be broadly divided into bonuses that shift to big bonuses and regular bonuses, small roles that involve paying out medals, and betting numbers. There is a re-player who can start the next game without needing it.

  The big bonus may be indicated as BB and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to set a winning flag in the RAM 41c to win the internal lottery and allow winning of the winning combination.

  10 to 13 are diagrams for explaining the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to winning combinations. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 and the transition of RT.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the slot machine in the present embodiment is controlled to any one of the normal gaming state, the inside 1, 2, RB, and BB (RB), and further the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the normal gaming state). In general, it is controlled to any one of RT0 to RT4.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the bonuses of the winning combination include two types of bonuses: a big bonus (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, each regular bonus is referred to as RB). included.

  BB is awarded when the combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. RB is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Black 7-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN.

  When BB wins, the game shifts to a big bonus that is controlled every game for a regular bonus during BB (hereinafter referred to as BBRB). The big bonus ends on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out.

  When the RB wins, a transition is made to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). The regular bonus ends on the condition that any winning combination has won 6 times or 12 games have been consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, from the internal winning of BB until winning a prize, the inside is controlled to 1 · RT0, and until the winning of RB after winning is internally controlled to 2 · RT0 inside. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, after the big bonus or the regular bonus (collectively referred to as a bonus) is completed, the control is performed to normal / RT4.

  Even if either BB or RB is won in an internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to make it possible to win these roles, they will win these roles. There is nothing. The symbols (“Black 7”, “White 7”, “Net 7”) that make up BB and RB are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. It is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the small combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning roles, there are middle bells, lower right bells, upper bells 1-8, middle watermelons, right lower watermelons, upper watermelons, lower cherries, middle cherries, one role, right-up bells, right-up bevels, Includes a rising rivet.

  The middle bell is awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN, and eight medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bells are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a middle bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A downward-sloping bell is when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is aligned on the winning line LN. Wins and 8 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one below the bell, and the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one above the bell. Therefore, when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is prepared, “Bell-Bell-Bell” ”Are lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  Further, either the plum or the replay is arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames in the middle reel 2C. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-down bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, upper bells 1 to 8 will be described. The upper bell 1 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 2 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Orange-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 3 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 4 is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 5 is awarded when a combination of “plum-orange-orange” is arranged on the winning line LN. The upper bell 6 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-Orange-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 7 is awarded when a combination of “Plum-BAR-Orange” is aligned on the winning line LN. The upper bell 8 is awarded when the combination of “Plum-BAR-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L, the BAR and orange of the middle reel, and the BAR and orange of the right reel 2R are arranged at positions one level below the bell. “Orange-Orange”, “Replay-Orange-BAR”, “Replay-BAR-Orange”, “Replay-BAR-BAR”, “Plum-Orange-Orange”, “Plum-Orange-BAR”, “Plum-BAR-” When any combination of “Orange” and “Plum-BAR-BAR” is aligned, the “Bell-Bell-Bell” combination is aligned to the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  In the left reel 2L, replays and plums are not arranged within 5 frames, and orange and BAR are not arranged within 5 frames for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. Therefore, even if one of the upper bells 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the winning upper bell configuration symbols must be operated at an appropriate timing. For example, you won't win the winning top bell.

  The middle stage watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is aligned on the winning line LN. When the middle watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, in the left reel 2L, any one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, but for each of the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, It is not placed within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the middle stage watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle stage watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The right-down watermelon is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. When a watermelon with a downward right wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is disposed at a position below one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are watermelon. Therefore, when any combination of “Bell-Watermelon-Black 7” and “Bell-Watermelon-White 7” is prepared, “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon”, “White The combination of “7-watermelon-watermelon” and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the watermelon of the middle reel 2C and the black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the right-down watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing, the right-down watermelon will be won. There is no.

  The upper watermelon is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” is aligned on the winning line LN. When the upper watermelon wins, 5 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position below one of black 7, white 7 and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C are watermelon. Since the replay of the right reel 2R is located one position below the watermelon, “Bell-Black 7-Replay” and “Bell-White 7-Replay” are arranged. When any of the combinations is completed, the combinations of “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white 7-watermelon-watermelon”, and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are aligned in the upper stage, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C and the replay of the right reel 2R are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the upper watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the upper watermelon will not be won if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. .

  The lower cherries are awarded when the combination of “BAR-Orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)”, “BAR-BAR-ANY”, “BAR-Bell-ANY” on the winning line LN. . When the lower cherries win, two medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, since the BAR of the left reel 2L is arranged one position above the cherry, “BAR-orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)”, “BAR- When any combination of “BAR-ANY” and “BAR-Bell-ANY” is prepared, “Cherry” on the left reel stops at the lower stage, and the combination of “Cherry-ANY-ANY” moves up and down to the right, That is, the invalid lines LM2 and LM4 are aligned.

  In the middle reel 2C, any one of orange, BAR, and bell is arranged within 5 frames, but in the left reel 2L, BAR is not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the lower cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the lower cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  The middle cherries are awarded when the combination of “cherry-ANY-ANY” is arranged on the winning line LN. When the middle cherries win, a medal is paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, cherries are not arranged within 5 frames in the left reel 2L. For this reason, even if the middle cherries are won in an internal lottery to be described later, the middle cherries will not be won if the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is not operated at an appropriate timing.

  One winning combination is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Cherry-Net 7” is aligned on the winning line LN. When one winning combination wins, one medal is paid out.

  Referring to FIG. 3, the black 7 of the left reel 2L, the cherry of the middle reel, and the net 7 of the right reel are not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if one winning combination is won in an internal lottery to be described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing. I won't win a prize.

  The bells that go up to the right are "Black 7-Bell-Orange", "White 7-Bell-Orange", "Watermelon Bell-Orange", "Black 7-Bell-BAR", and "White 7-Bell-" on the winning line LN. When any combination of “BAR” and “Watermelon Bell-BAR” is completed, a prize is awarded and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, black 7, white 7 and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above the bell, and orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are one position below the bell. "Black 7-Bell-Orange", "White 7-Bell-Orange", "Watermelon Bell-Orange", "Black 7-Bell-BAR", "White 7-Bell-BAR" When any combination of “watermelon-bell-BAR” is aligned, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” goes up to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, BAR One of these is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-up bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A bevel that goes up to the right is awarded when any combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell”, “White 7-Bell-Bell”, and “Watermelon Bell-Bell” is placed on the winning line LN. Medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7, white 7 and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged one position above the bell, and the bell of the right reel 2R is one below the replay or plum. When the combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell”, “White 7-Bell-Bell” and “Watermelon Bell-Bell” is prepared, “Bell-Bell-Replay”, “ The combination of “bell-bell-plum” rises to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, and in the middle reel 2C and right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a right-up bevel is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Ribbe, which goes up to the right, wins when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Orange” and “Bell-Bell-BAR” is aligned on the winning line LN, and 10 medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position one below the bell. Therefore, when any combination of “Bell-Bell-Orange” and “Bell-Bell-BAR” is prepared, the combination of “Replay-Bell-Bell” and “Plum-Bell-Bell” is raised to the right, that is, invalid. It will be aligned with the line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, one of orange and BAR is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when an upward lottery is won in an internal lottery to be described later, a winning combination can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the re-game player among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying role includes normal replay, lower stage replay, fall replay, promotion replays 1 and 2, special replay, and SP (special) replay.

  The normal replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay”, “Replay-Replay-Plum”, “Plum-Replay-Replay”, and “Plum-Replay-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. Replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames in each of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. Therefore, as a general rule, it can be said that the normal replay is a role that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is made.

  The lower replay includes “Bell-Orange-Orange”, “Belle-Orange-Cherry”, “Belle-Orange-Watermelon”, “Belle-Orange-Black 7”, “Belle-Orange-Net 7”, "Bell-Orange-White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7" , “BELL-BAR-WHITE 7” combination is awarded.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. "Bell-orange-orange", "bell-orange-cherry", "bell-orange-watermelon", "bell-orange-black 7", "bell-orange-net 7", "bell-orange-" "White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-Watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7", "Bell-BAR" When any combination of “White 7” is prepared, “Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7”, “Replay-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Chi Lee / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Replay-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7 ”,“ Plum-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / The combination of “net 7 / white 7” is aligned at the lower stage, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  Further, in the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, cherry, watermelon, black 7, net 7 , One of white 7 is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the lower stage replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The tumble replay is awarded when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN.

  Referring now to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is located one position above the replay or plum, and the bell of the right reel 2R is located one position below the replay. So, when the combination of “bell-replay-bell” is complete, the combination of “replay-replay-replay”, “replay-replay-plum”, “plum-replay-replay”, “plum-replay-plum” goes up to the right. That is, they are aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when a fall replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that a prize can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the fall replay in normal / RT0, it is controlled to RT1.

  The promotion replay 1 is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN. In the left reel 2L, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, it can be said that, as a general rule, the promotion replay 1 can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if it is won.

  Promotion Replay 2 is when any combination of “Bell-Orange-Replay”, “Bell-Orange-Plum”, “Bell-BAR-Replay”, and “Bell-BAR-Plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. Winning a prize.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. Since the replay and plum of the right reel 2R are arranged one position above the bell, “bell-orange-replay”, “bell-orange-plum”, “bell-BAR-replay”, “ When the combination of “bell-BAR-plum” is arranged, the combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is arranged in the lower stage, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, replay and plum are arranged within 5 frames. ing. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when the promotion replay 2 is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, as a rule, it can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning a promotion replay (promotion replay 1 or promotion replay 2) in normal / RT1, control is made to normal / RT0. As will be described later, the promotion replay is set not to win independently in the internal lottery in normal / RT2, normal / RT3, and normal / RT4. Further, when the special combination and the promotion replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4, it is controlled to the internal 1 / RT0 or the internal 2 / RT0 at that time. For this reason, no promotion replay is won in normal / RT2, normal / RT3, or normal / RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from normal / RT2, normal / RT3, normal / RT4 to normal / RT0, and only when it is normal / RT1 is promoted replay, and only from normal / RT1 is normal / RT0. It is comprised so that it may be controlled.

  The special replay is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-replay” and “bell-replay-plum” is arranged on the winning line LN. In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel 2C, the replay is arranged within 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, one of the replays and plums is arranged within 5 frames. ing. Therefore, as a general rule, special replays can be said to be a role that can be awarded regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if they are elected.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the special replay in normal / RT1 and normal / RT3, control is performed to normal / RT2. In addition, after winning the special replay in normal / RT2, control is performed to normal / RT1. As will be described later, the special replay is set so as not to be won independently in the internal lottery in the normal / RT1 and normal / RT4. Further, when the special combination and special replay are won at the same time in the internal / RT1 or normal / RT4 internal lottery, the internal 1 / RT0 or the internal 2 / RT0 is controlled at that time. Therefore, the special replay is not won in normal / RT1 and normal / RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from normal / RT1, normal / RT4 to normal / RT2, and a special replay is awarded only in normal / RT0, normal / RT3, and from normal / RT0 / normal / RT3. Only normal and RT2 are controlled.

  The SP replay includes “Replay-Orange-Black 7”, “Replay-Orange-Net 7”, “Replay-Orange-White 7”, “Replay-Orange-Plum”, “Replay-BAR-Black 7” on the winning line LN. ”,“ Replay-BAR-Net 7 ”,“ Replay-BAR-White 7 ”,“ Replay-BAR-Plum ”,“ Plum-Orange-Black 7 ”,“ Plum-Orange-Net 7 ”,“ Plum-Orange ” -White 7 "," Plum-Orange-Plum "," Plum-BAR-Black 7 "," Plum-BAR-Net 7 "," Plum-BAR-White 7 "," Plum-BAR-Plum " The winning combination will be awarded when the combination is complete.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one above the orange and BAR, and the black 7, net 7, white 7 and plum of the right reel 2R are orange. , Because it is located one position below the BAR, "Orange-Orange-Orange", "Orange-Orange-BAR", "Orange-BAR-BAR", "BAR-Orange-Orange", "BAR-Orange" The combination of “−BAR” and “BAR-BAR-BAR” rises to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, replay and plum are arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel orange and BAR are arranged in 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, black 7, net 7, white 7, The plum is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when SP replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that the winning can be made regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the SP replay in normal / RT2, control is performed in normal / RT3. As will be described later, the SP replay is set not to win independently in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4. Further, when the special combination and SP replay are won at the same time in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4, the internal one / RT0 or the internal two / RT0 is controlled at that time. Therefore, the SP replay is not won in the normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4. As a result, normal / RT0, normal / RT1, and normal / RT4 are not controlled to normal / RT3, and SP replay is awarded only when normal / RT2 and normal / RT3 only from normal / RT2. It is comprised so that it may be controlled. If the special replay is won in the normal / RT3, the normal / RT3 is maintained.

  Next, the transition outcome will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the transition items are “replay-orange-bell”, “replay-BAR-bell”, “plum-orange-bell”, “plum-BAR-bell”, “replay-bell-orange”. ”,“ Replay-Bell-BAR ”,“ Plum-Bell-Orange ”,“ Plum-Bell-BAR ”,“ Black 7-Orange-Orange ”,“ Black 7-Orange-BAR ”,“ Black 7-BAR- ” "Orange", "Black 7-BAR-BAR", "White 7-Orange-Orange", "White 7-Orange-BAR", "White 7-BAR-Orange", "White 7-BAR-BAR", "Watermelon -Orange-orange "," Watermelon-orange-BAR "," Watermelon-BAR-orange "," Watermelon-BAR-BAR ". In the present embodiment, left bells 1 to 4, middle bells 1 to 4, and right bells 1 to 4, which will be described later, are elected, and the reels other than the reels that serve as winning conditions for the middle bell are set as the first stop and are elected When the bell is missed, the above-mentioned transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 14, normal / RT0, normal / RT2, normal / RT3, and normal / RT4 are controlled to normal / RT1 after the transition points are aligned with the winning line LN. In addition, when the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN in the normal / RT1, the normal / RT1 is maintained.

  Next, a combination of lottery target combinations that are read out as lottery target combinations for each gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the inside 1 (the state where the BB is elected), the inside 2 (the state where the RB is elected), the BB ( RB) or RB, the winning combination that is the subject of the internal lottery and its winning probability differ. Furthermore, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, at least one of the re-game player and the winning probability to be subject to the internal lottery differs depending on the types of RT0 to RT4. As will be described later as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read simultaneously and can be won in duplicate. By indicating “+” between winning combinations, it indicates that the winning combination is simultaneously read out in the internal lottery.

  Normal / RT0, when BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle stage cherry, BB + 1 single-player, BB + normal replay, BB + tumble replay, BB + promoted replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, single role, replay GR11, replay GR12, replay GR13, replay GR14 , Replay GR15, replay GR16, replay GR21, replay GR22, replay GR23, lip Lee GR24, becomes replay GR25 is the subject role of internal lottery.

  In addition, a weak watermelon is an upper stage watermelon + right-down watermelon. That is, when the upper watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a weak watermelon. A strong watermelon is a middle-stage watermelon + right-down watermelon. That is, when the middle stage watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a strong watermelon. A weak cherry is a lower cherry alone, and a strong cherry is a lower cherry plus one piece. In the weak cherries, the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” in the middle tier can be recognized as weak cherries, while the cherry stops at the lower tier of the left reel 2L and the BAR-BAR in the middle tier. It can be recognized that it is a strong cherry when the combination of “−BAR” is prepared.

  The promotion replay is promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2. The bell is a middle bell + a downward-sloping bell. Left bell 1 is right falling bell 5 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8, left bell 2 is right falling bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7, and left bell 3 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3, left bell 4 is right falling bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4. The left bells 1 to 4 are also simply called left bells. The middle bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 5, the middle bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 6, and the middle bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 7 and the middle bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 8. The middle bells 1 to 4 are also simply called middle bells. The right bell 1 is the middle bell + the upper bell 3 + the upper bell 5, the right bell 2 is the middle bell + the upper bell 1 + the upper bell 7, and the right bell 3 is the middle bell + the upper bell 4 + the upper bell. 6 and the right bell 4 is the middle bell + the upper bell 2 + the upper bell 8. The right bells 1 to 4 are also simply called right bells. The left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4 are also simply referred to as push order bells.

  Replay GR11 is a fall replay + promotion replay 2, replay GR12 is a fall replay + promotion replay 2 + normal replay, replay GR13 is a fall replay + promotion replay 1, and replay GR14 is a fall Replay + promotion replay 1 + normal replay, replay GR15 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, and replay GR16 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + normal replay.

  Replay GR21 is tumble replay + special replay, replay GR22 is tumble replay + special replay + normal replay, replay GR23 is tumble replay + special replay + lower replay, and replay GR24 is Tumble replay + special replay + normal replay + lower replay. Replay GR25 is tumble replay + special replay + promotion replay 1.

  When it is normal and RT1, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle stage cherry, BB + 1 single-player, BB + normal replay, BB + tumble replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, single role, normal replay, replay GR1, replay GR2, replay GR3 The replay GR4, the replay GR5, and the replay GR6 are subject to internal lottery.

  Replay GR1 is normal replay + promotion replay 1, replay GR2 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, replay GR3 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + lower replay, and replay GR4. Is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + lower replay, replay GR5 is normal replay + promotion replay 2, and replay GR6 is normal replay + promotion replay 2 + lower replay.

  Normal / RT2, when BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle stage cherry, BB + 1 single-player, BB + normal replay, BB + tumble replay, BB + promoted replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, single role, normal replay, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33 The replay GR34, the replay GR35, and the replay GR36 are subject to internal lottery.

  Replay GR31 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay, replay GR32 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + falling replay, and replay GR33 is special replay + SP replay + lower replay, and replay GR34. Is special replay + SP replay + lower replay + falling replay, replay GR35 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay, and replay GR36 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay + It is a fall replay.

  Normal / RT3, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherries, BB + 1 single-player, BB + normal replay, BB + tumble replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one piece, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33, replay GR34 The replay GR35, the replay GR36, and the SP replay are targeted for internal lottery.

  When it is normal and RT4, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle stage cherry, BB + 1 single-player, BB + normal replay, BB + tumble replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, The middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle tier cherry, one-piece combination, and normal replay are subject to internal lottery.

  When internal center 1 · RT0, internal center 2 · RT0, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, center bell 1, center bell 2, center bell 3, center bell 4, right Bell 1, Right bell 2, Right bell 3, Right bell 4, Weak watermelon, Strong watermelon, Weak cherry, Strong cherry, Middle cherry, Single role, Normal replay, Lower replay, SP replay, Tumble replay, Promotion replay, Special Replay is the target for internal lottery.

  When BB (RB) / RT0, weak cherry and all roles are eligible for internal lottery. When RB / RT0, all roles, RB bell 1, RB bell 2, and RB bell 3 are eligible for internal lottery. It becomes.

  All roles are all small roles other than right-up bevel, ie middle bell + right-down bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + Lower right watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherries + 1 piece + right rising bell + right rising rivet.

  The RB bell 1 is a right-up bell + right-up bevel, the RB bell 2 is a right-up bell + right-up bevel + right-up beryl, and the RB bell 3 is all small roles, that is, the middle stage bell. + Downward bell + Upper bell 1 + Upper bell 2 + Upper bell 3 + Upper bell 4 + Upper bell 5 + Upper bell 6 + Upper bell 7 + Upper bell 8 + Middle watermelon + Lower watermelon + Upper watermelon + Lower cherry + Middle cherry + Single role + Upright Bell + bevel up to the right + bevel up to the right.

  Also, in normal / RT0-4, etc., weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, one piece, normal replay, fall replay, promotion replay, SP replay that can be won simultaneously with either BB or RB The number of judgment values is 1 for internal / RT0 and 2 for internal / RT0, which are read separately from the special role, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single role, normal replay, falling Since it is added to replay, promotion replay, and SP replay, the winning probability for each of the strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherries, single-player, normal replay, fall replay, promotion replay, and SP replay is constant. Is secured.

  In this way, the internal lottery role varies depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 1 or 2 inside, BB (RB), or RB, and BB (RB) In RB, the internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probability of the small role is set higher than in the normal gaming state and inside.

  Also, when the game state is 1 or 2 in the inside, the subject of the internal lottery does not change depending on whether it is 1 in the inside or 2 in the inside, but it is 1 in the inside or inside The internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probabilities of the target re-gamer are different.

  In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the re-game player to be subject to the internal lottery differs depending on whether it is RT0-4, and depending on whether it is RT0-4 An internal lottery is performed using a lottery table with different re-game players and their winning probabilities.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of types of small roles (bells) and a plurality of types of re-playing roles are simultaneously won, the types of the selected small roles and re-playing roles and the stop Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the small combination and the combination of the re-playing combination determined according to the pressing order of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are aligned and stopped on the winning line LN within a drawing range of up to four frames. Accordingly, the types of the small combination and re-playing combination to be won simultaneously will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. FIG. 15 shows a list of small combinations and re-playing combination to be simultaneously won. FIG. 16 shows reel control when a plurality of replays are won simultaneously, and FIG. 17 shows reel control when a plurality of small roles are won simultaneously.

  As shown in FIG. 16, when the replay GR1 (normal replay + promotion replay 1) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, the combination of the promoted replay 1 among the selected replay players is won. Control to stop in line with the line LN is performed, and when stop operation is performed in an order other than left center right, control to stop the combination of normal replays in line with the winning line LN is performed.

  When replay GR2 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right middle, control is performed to align the combination of normal replays to the winning line LN and stop.

  If Replay GR3 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle left or right order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replay players will be aligned to the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR4 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle right / left order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replaying players is placed on the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When replay GR5 (normal replay + promotion replay 2) is won and stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right, the combination of the promotion replay 2 among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR6 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 of the selected replaying players is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when stop operations are performed in an order other than right center left, control is performed to align the normal replay combination with the winning line LN and stop.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the promoted replay 1, the promoted replay 2, and the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, so that the stop The reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R according to the operation order.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for allowing the replays GR1 to 6 to win the promoted replays 1 and 2.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT1 where the replays GR1 to 6 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR1 to GR6 is elected, the promoted replay wins with a probability of 1/6, and the normal / RT0 Will be migrated.

  When replay GR11 (falling replay + promotion replay 2) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, the combination of promotion replay 2 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, the stop replay combination is controlled to be aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR12 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than left and right, the control for stopping the combination of falling replays on the winning line LN is performed.

  When the replay GR13 (falling replay + promotion replay 1) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, the control of stopping the combination of the promotion replay 1 among the selected replay players in the winning line LN If the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle left and right, control is performed to stop the combination of falling replays on the winning line LN.

  If Replay GR14 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle right-left order, the combination of Promotion Replay 1 among the selected replay players will be aligned to the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays aligned with the winning line LN.

  When Replay GR15 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle left and right, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 of the selected re-players is aligned with the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle right and left, control is performed to stop the combination of falling replays aligned with the winning line LN.

  If Replay GR16 (Tumble Replay + Promotion Replay 1 + Promotion Replay 2 + Normal Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of Promotion Replay 2 among the selected re-playing players will be the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the right middle left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays on the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. The reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2 or the fall replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R according to the operation order.

  As described above, different operation modes are set as the operation modes in order to allow the replays GR11 to 16 to win the promoted replays 1 and 2 and to avoid the fall replay.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT0 where the replay GRs 11-16 are subject to internal lottery, if any of the replays GR11-16 is elected, the promoted replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and the normal / RT0 is maintained. On the other hand, the fall replay wins with a probability of 5/6 and shifts to normal RT1.

  When the replay GR21 (falling replay + special replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left middle, right, and right, the combination of the special replays among the replaying players who have won is controlled to stop at the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left middle right, control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays aligned with the winning line LN.

  When replay GR22 (falling replay + special replay + normal replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, the control is performed to stop the combination of the fall replays on the winning line LN.

  When replay GR23 (falling replay + special replay + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle / left / right order, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle left and right, the control is performed so that the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When Replay GR24 (Tumble Replay + Special Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is made in the middle right-left order, the combination of special replays among the selected replay players is aligned to the winning line LN If the stop operation is performed in an order other than middle right and left, the combination of falling replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  If Replay GR25 (Tumble Replay + Special Replay + Promotion Replay 1) is elected and right-pressed, that is, if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the right reel 2R is first stopped, the special replay among the replayed players selected When the stop operation is performed in the operation mode in which the combination of the above is aligned with the pay line LN and left-pressed, that is, in the operation mode in which the left reel 2L is first stopped or in the middle mode, that is, in the operation mode in which the middle reel 2C is first stopped. In this case, a control is performed to stop the combination of falling replays in line with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, since the symbols constituting the special replay and the fall replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less in all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, Regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, the reel control is performed so that the special replay or the fall replay is always won.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as the operation modes in order to win special replays and avoid falling replays with the replays GR21 to GR25.

  For this reason, if one of the replays GR21 to 25 is elected in the normal / RT0 in which the replays GR21 to 25 are the targets of the internal lottery, the special replay wins with a probability of 1/5 and shifts to the normal / RT2. On the other hand, the fall replay wins with a probability of 4/5 and shifts to normal RT1.

  When replay GR31 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is stopped in line with the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right button. In the case where it has been made, a control for stopping the combination of special replays in alignment with the winning line LN is performed.

  When replay GR32 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay + fall replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle and right, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected re-playing players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is stopped on the winning line LN.

  When replay GR33 (special replay + SP replay + lower stage replay) is won, and stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, the control for stopping the combination of SP replays in the winning replay combination in line with the winning line LN If the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN, and the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right. In the case where it has been made, a control for stopping the combination of special replays in alignment with the winning line LN is performed.

  When Replay GR34 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Lower Replay + Falling Replay) is won and the stop operation is made in the middle right / left order, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN. If stop operation is performed in the order of middle left and right, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped, and left or right press When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is stopped on the winning line LN.

  When Replay GR35 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, the combination of SP replays among the selected replay players is aligned with the winning line LN When the stop operation is performed in the order of right middle, left, and right, the combination of normal replays among the selected re-playing players is controlled to stop at the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is stopped on the winning line LN.

  If Replay GR36 (Special Replay + SP Replay + Normal Replay + Lower Replay + Falling Replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of SP Replay among the selected replayers will be the winning line When the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, when the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays among the selected replay players is stopped in alignment with the winning line LN. Alternatively, when a stop operation is performed by middle pressing, control is performed so that the combination of special replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the SP replay, special replay, and normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less in all of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R. Accordingly, the reel control is performed so that the SP replay, special replay, or normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  In this way, different operation modes are set as operation modes for winning SP replays with the replay GRs 31 to 36, and different operations are performed as operation modes for winning SP replays or normal replays and avoiding special replays. A mode is set.

  Therefore, in the normal / RT2 where the replay GRs 31 to 36 are the targets of the internal lottery, if any of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won, the SP replay is won with a probability of 1/6 and the process proceeds to the normal / RT3. On the other hand, the normal replay or special replay is won with a probability of 5/6 and the normal / RT2 is maintained. In addition, when SP replay wins as will be described later, one or more navigation stocks that are advantageous to the player will always be given, so if one of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won in normal / RT2 One or more SP replays are won with a probability of 1/6, and one or more navigation stocks are given, and it is easy to win SP replays, that is, it is possible to shift to normal RT3 where there is a high possibility that navigation stocks will be given.

  In addition, in normal / RT3 where the replay GRs 31 to 36 are the targets of the internal lottery, if one of the replays GR31 to 36 is won, the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and one navigation stock described later On the other hand, the normal replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and normal RT3 is maintained, and the special replay wins with a probability of 4/6 and shifts to normal RT2.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the left bell 1 (lower right bell + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8) is won and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of the right lowering bell among the selected small roles is selected. The stop control is performed in line with the winning line LN, and when the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right side, any combination of the upper bell 5, the upper bell 8 or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. To control.

  If left bell 2 (lower right bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7) wins and the stop operation is performed by left-pressing, the combination of right-down bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 3 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the right falling bell combination of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed such that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  If left bell 4 (lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the combination of the right falling bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 4, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration symbol of the right-down bell is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the left bells 1 to 4 are elected, a stop operation is performed by pushing left. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the right lowering bell is aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the left bells 1 to 4 are elected because there are places that are arranged, if the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or right, it becomes the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the winning upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, the control is performed so that the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles with the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles with the winning line LN is stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 6, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When middle bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle bell, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles on the winning line LN is stopped. If a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the middle bell 1 to 4 is elected, when the stop operation is performed by middle push Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the middle bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, an appropriate range that will be drawn in the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 will be used. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 1 upper bell 7) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pushing right, the combination of middle bells among the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 7, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 5) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of the middle bells of the elected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped.

  When right bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 6) is elected and a stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells among the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 6, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When right bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 8) is elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of middle bells of the selected small roles is stopped in alignment with winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 8, or the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the right bell 1 to 4 is elected, when the stop operation is performed by pushing right However, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is always performed so that the middle bell is aligned with the winning line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Therefore, even if the right bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, an appropriate drawing range of the constituent symbols of the elected upper bells 1 to 8 is appropriate. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the selected upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in this case, control is performed so that the shift outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when any of the left bell, middle bell, right bell, that is, the push order bell is won, the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination. While the right-down bell or middle bell always wins, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination, the upper bell is aligned at 1/4, but 3/4 In some cases, the upper bells are not aligned and the transition outcomes are aligned.

  For this reason, at the time of winning the push order bell, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not it is operated in a specific operation mode according to the type of winning combination. In other words, even if one of the push order bells is won, it is impossible to intentionally select a specific operation mode unless the type is known. Although a medal can be surely obtained by winning a prize, the upper bell can be won only by 1/4 at a ratio of 2/3, and a medal cannot be surely obtained.

  When RB bell 1 (Right-up bell + Right-up Rivebe) is elected and a stop operation is performed by left-pressing, control is performed so that the combination of right-up bells among the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If a stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, control is performed to align the combination of rising right ribs on the winning line LN and stop.

  If RB Bell 2 (Rising Right Bell + Right Rising Bevel + Right Rising Berri) is won and stopped by pressing the middle, the combination of the right rising bells of the selected small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed by pressing the button to the left, the control is performed to stop the right-up bevel combination in alignment with the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed by pressing the button to the right, Control is performed to stop the combination in line with the winning line LN.

  RB bell 3 (middle bell + lower right bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherry +1 sheet role + right-up bell + right-up bevel + right-up bevel), and if the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of right-up bells in the selected small role is aligned with the winning line LN Control to stop is performed, and when a stop operation is performed by left-pressing or middle-pressing, control is performed to stop the right-beveled bevel combination aligned with the winning line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the configuration symbols of the right-up bell, the right-up bevel, and the right-up bevel are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the RB bells 1 to 4 are won, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, any combination of right-up bell, right-up ribebe and right-up bevel will be aligned on the winning line LN and 10 medals will be paid out, but at a rate of 1/3 Only "bell-bell-bell" combinations will be aligned to the right.

  Although not particularly illustrated, when a bell (middle bell + lower right bell) is won, a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on the winning line LN regardless of the stop order of the reels and the operation timing. To be controlled.

  Also, all roles (middle bell + lower right bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + right lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle (Cherry + 1 hand + right-up bell + right-up rivebe) is selected, the “bell-bell-bell” combination is controlled to rise to the right regardless of the reel stop order and operation timing. The

[Game flow]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, the normal gaming state, one in the inside, two in the inside, RB, and BB (RB) are controlled. In the normal gaming state, any of RT0 to RT4 is controlled. It is controlled.

  As described above, the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is allocated with an area for storing a gaming state flag that can specify a gaming state and an area for storing an RT flag that can specify an RT type. Yes.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the lottery table in which the number of determination values of the target combination is determined, the lottery table for internal one, the lottery table for internal two, the lottery table for RB, and for BB (RB) Each has a lottery table and a lottery table for the normal gaming state. Further, as a lottery table for the normal gaming state, a lottery table for RT0, a lottery table for RT1, a lottery table for RT2, and a lottery table for RT3 And RT4 lottery tables.

  Then, in the internal lottery process, referring to the value of the gaming state flag and the value of the RT flag stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, the gaming state and the RT type are specified, and the lottery table is selected accordingly. By performing the lottery using the selected lottery table, the lottery subject according to the gaming state and the RT type is selected with the winning probability according to the gaming state and the RT type.

  Specifically, referring to the value of the gaming state flag stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, whether the current gaming state is BB (RB), whether it is RB, whether it is 1 in the inside, It is determined whether or not it is 2 in the inside, and if the current gaming state is in BB (RB), for the BB (RB) in which the target combination of the internal lottery in BB (RB) and the number of determination values thereof are stored The lottery table is selected and the lottery is performed. If it is during the RB, the lottery table for the RB in which the target part of the internal lottery in RB and the number of determination values thereof are stored is selected and the lottery is performed. If it is 2 in the internal lottery, the lottery table for the internal 1 is selected and the lottery table for the internal 1 is stored. Inside the target role and the number of judgment values If the current gaming state is neither BB (RB), RB, nor internal 1 or 2, i.e., the normal gaming state, the lottery table is selected in the RAM 41c. Refers to the stored RT flag value, selects the lottery table for normal use in which the target combination of internal lottery and the number of judgment values are stored according to the RT type specified from the value, and draws Thus, the lottery of the target combination corresponding to each gaming state and the type of RT is performed with a winning probability corresponding to each gaming state and the type of RT.

  Normal / RT0 is normal / RT1 when a promotion replay wins (when either one of the replays GR1 to GR6 is elected and a stop operation is performed in the order in which the promotion replay wins), normal / RT1 or normal / RT2 Shifts when the game is completed due to the consumption of the specified number of games. Regardless of the number of games after the transition to normal / RT0, the normal / RT0 shifts to the normal / RT1 by winning the fall replay or stopping the transition, or to the normal / RT2 by winning the special replay It ends when the special role is elected and moves to the inside 1 or inside 2 inside.

  Normal / RT1 is transitioned when normal / RT0, normal / RT2, normal / RT3, normal / RT4 stops, or normal / RT0 falls down, or normal / RT2 moves when special replay wins To do. The normal RT1 is such that the RT remaining game count is subtracted for each game, and the RT remaining game count becomes 0 after digesting the specified game count (1000G in the present embodiment). The process ends when the transition is made to normal / RT0 or the special role is won and the transition is made to internal 1 or internal 2.

  Normal / RT2 shifts when a special replay wins in normal / RT0 or normal / RT3. In normal / RT2, the number of remaining RT games is subtracted for each game, and when the prescribed number of games (30G in the present embodiment) is consumed, the number of remaining RT games becomes zero. Transition to normal / RT0, SP replay wins and transition to normal / RT3, transitional event stops and transition to normal / RT1, or special role is won and internal 1 or internal 2 It ends by moving to.

  Normal / RT3 shifts when SP replay wins in normal / RT2. Regardless of the number of games since the transition to normal / RT3, whether or not the normal / RT3 shifts to the normal / RT2 with the special replay winning, or the transition outcome stops and shifts to the normal / RT1 When the special role is elected and moves to the inside 1 or the inside 2, it ends.

  Normal / RT4 shifts to the end of BB (RB) and RB. Regardless of the number of games since the transition to the normal / RT4, the normal / RT4 stops the transition and moves to the RT1, or the special role is elected and moves to the internal 1 or the internal 2 To finish.

  The inside 1 shifts when the BB among special roles is won in the normal gaming state. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the inside, the inside 1 finishes when the special role that triggered the transition to the inside 1 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB. .

  The inside 2 shifts when the RB wins the special combination in the normal gaming state. Then, inside 2 ends regardless of the number of games since the transition to the inside, when the special combination that triggered the transition to the inside 2 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB. .

  RB shifts when RB wins in 1 and 2 inside. And RB is complete | finished by digesting 12 games or winning 6 times.

  BB (RB) shifts when BB wins inside. Then, BB (RB) ends when the total number of medals paid out to BB (RB) exceeds the prescribed number, regardless of the number of games since the transition to BB (RB).

  In addition, the slot machine in the present embodiment can execute a navigation effect informing the sub-control unit 91 of information that can specify the push order for winning the navigation target role when winning the navigation target role. The effect state can be controlled during an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) that is a notification period.

  Here, the gaming state and the RT transition status of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, when RB or BB (RB) ends, the routine shifts to normal RT4.

  In normal / RT4, when the transition is stopped, the transition is made to RT1, and when the special role is elected, the transition is made to internal 1 or internal 2 according to the type of the special role won.

  In normal / RT4, if any of the left bells 1-4, middle bells 1-4, right bells 1-4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome will stop. Therefore, any of the left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, the right bell 1-4 can be won and the small role can be won in the normal RT 4 which has been shifted to after the end of RB or BB (RB) If not, the process moves to normal RT1.

  Normally, in RT1, the special role is not won, the promotion replay is not won, the specified number of games (1000G) is consumed, or the promotion replay wins, and the normal role is transferred to RT0, and the special role is won Depending on the type of the special role that has been won, the game moves to the inside 1 or 2 inside.

  Usually ・ Replay GR1-6 wins in RT1, and the promotion replay wins when the stop order is correct. Therefore, in normal ・ RT1, replay GR1-6 wins and corrects in the order of stop. It will shift to RT0.

  In normal / RT0, if the fall replay wins, or if the transition is stopped, it moves to normal / RT1, and if the special replay wins, it moves to normal / RT2, and the special role is won. Depending on the type of the special role, it shifts to 1 inside or 2 inside.

  Usually, the replays GR11 to 16 are won at RT0, the promotion replay wins when the stopping order is correct, and the fall replay wins when the answer is incorrect. In addition, when the replays GR21 to 25 are elected in normal / RT0 and the stop order is correct, the special replay is won, and if the answer is incorrect, the fall replay is won. In addition, in the case of normal / RT0, when any of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4 and the right bells 1 to 4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome stops. Therefore, in normal / RT0, the replay GRs 21 to 25 are elected and the stop order is correct, so that the transition is made to normal / RT2 and the replay GRs 11 to 16 are elected and the stop order is incorrect or the left bell 1 -4, middle bell 1 to 4, right bell 1 to 4 are elected, and if it is not possible to win a small role, it will shift to normal · RT1.

  Normally, in RT2, the special role is not won, SP replay is not won, and the regular game number (30G) is used to move to normal RT0, and SP replay is won to move to normal RT3, When the special role is elected, it shifts to 1 inside or 2 inside depending on the kind of the special role won.

  In normal / RT2, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are won, and the SP replay wins when the stop order is correct. Further, in the normal / RT2, when any of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4 and the right bell 1 to 4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome stops. For this reason, in normal / RT2, the replays GR31 to 36 are elected, and when the stopping order is correct, the routine proceeds to normal / RT3, and any of the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, and the right bell 1 to 4 Will be transferred to normal / RT1 if the winning combination is not successful.

  In normal / RT3, when the special replay wins, it moves to RT2, and when the transition roll stops, it moves to normal / RT1, and the special role is elected. Transition to Medium 1 or Internal 2

  In normal / RT3, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are elected, the SP replay or the normal replay is won when the stop order is correct, and the special replay is won if the answer is incorrect. Further, in the normal / RT3, when any one of the left bells 1 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4 and the right bells 1 to 4 is won and the small role cannot be won, the transitional outcome is stopped. For this reason, in normal / RT3, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are elected, and the stop order becomes incorrect, so the routine proceeds to normal / RT2, and the left bell 1 to 4, the middle bell 1 to 4, the right bell 1 to 4 If either of them wins and the small combination cannot be won, the routine will shift to RT1.

  In the inside 1 and 2, the special role that triggers the transition to the inside wins a transition to RB or BB (RB).

[About the production control of the sub-control unit]
Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the sub control unit 91 receives a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The reception buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub-control unit 91 is the earliest. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the stage, and the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc. are controlled based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Performs output control of various rendering devices.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. Control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives a command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. Among these, the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed and sets the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  When the winning number command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the winning number command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub control unit 91 receives the winning number command, the sub control unit 91 stores the effect pattern in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the winning number command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. Even if the same command is received, different control patterns are selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the winning number command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  Next, various control contents executed by the sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described below.

[Startup processing (sub)]
First, the control contents of the startup process (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95, the sub control unit 91 performs a startup process (sub).

  First, the sub-control unit 91 initializes the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, and the like (Sn1), and then permits access to the RAM 91c (Sn2). Next, the power interruption recovery command 1, power interruption recovery command 2, power interruption recovery command 3, power interruption recovery command 4, and hot start command generated in Sa12 to Sa16 of the startup process (main) of FIGS. It is determined whether or not it has been received from the control unit 41 (Sn3). If these commands have not been received, it is determined whether or not the setting change start command generated in Sa16 of the startup process (main) in FIGS. 5 and 6 has been received from the main control unit 41 (Sn4). . When a setting change start command is received, a setting change start command flag indicating that the setting change start command has been received is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Sn5).

  When the power interruption return command 1, the power interruption recovery command 2, the power interruption recovery command 3, the power interruption recovery command 4, the hot start command are received, and when the setting change start command is received, is there backup data in the RAM 91c? It is determined whether or not. Whether or not there is backup data in the RAM 91c is confirmed by, for example, whether or not there is a backup flag set in the RAM 91c in the power interruption process described later (Sn6). If the backup flag is not set in the step of Sn6, initialization of the RAM 91c is executed (Sn13). On the other hand, if it is determined in Sn6 that the backup flag is set, the data in the RAM is normal and the backup flag is cleared (Sn7).

  When the backup flag is cleared in step Sn7, the RAM parity of all storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sn8). In the Sn9 step, it is determined whether or not the RAM parity calculated in the Sn8 step is zero. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sn9, initialization of the RAM 91c is executed (Sn13).

  In the step of Sn9, if the RAM parity is 0, it is determined whether or not the setting change command reception flag is stored in the RAM 91c (Sn10).

  If the setting change start command reception flag is stored in the RAM 91c, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13). When the setting change start command reception flag is not stored in the RAM 91c, the return process is executed based on the backed up data (Sn11). Then, the sub-control unit 91 described in FIG. 33 permits timer interrupt processing (sub) interrupts to be executed at regular intervals (1.12 ms intervals), and executes timer interrupt processing in response to timer interrupts. To do. If it is determined in step Sn4 that the setting change start command has not been received, has the error start command generated in Sa22 of the startup process (main) in FIG. 5 been received from the main control unit 41? It is determined whether or not (Sn14). If it is determined that an error start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sn15, initialization of the RAM 91c is executed, and error processing is performed (Sn16). In the error process, an error notification is made. For example, when the error state is canceled by operating the reset / setting switch 38 by a game clerk, the error notification is terminated and the original state is restored. If it is determined that the error start command has not been received, that is, if the setting change start command, the return command, and the error start command have not been received, initialization of the RAM 91c is executed (Sn13). Then, the sub-control unit 91 described in FIG. 19 permits the interrupt of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed at regular intervals (interval of 1.12 ms), and executes the timer interrupt process according to the timer interrupt. To do.

[Timer interrupt processing (sub)]
Next, timer interrupt processing (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 (CPU 91c) at intervals of 1.12 seconds based on the count value of the internal clock will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub control unit 91 first saves the register in use to the stack area (Sp1). Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sp2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 48. If a voltage drop signal is input, whether or not the voltage drop signal is input in the previous power failure determination process as well. If a voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that is set.

  After the power failure determination process in the step of Sp2, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (Sp3). If the power interruption flag is set, the process proceeds to a power interruption process (sub). In the power interruption process (sub), the backup flag used in the determination of Sn6 in the startup process (sub) shown in FIG. 14 is set after the backup data is created, or used in the determination of Sn9 in the startup process (sub) shown in FIG. The checksum is calculated by calculating the exclusive OR of the backup data.

  If the power interruption flag is not set, command analysis processing is executed (Sp4). In the command analysis process, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the command buffer. If the command is stored in the command buffer, the command is acquired from the command buffer. And the process according to the acquired command is performed.

  Next, in the AT (assist time) in which the navigation effect is executed when the winning role is selected, the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of medals given to the player by paying out medals from the number of medals used by the player in the game. A net increase counting process for counting the net increase after subtracting the number of sheets is executed (Sp5). In the navigation effect, the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is notified.

  Next, the sub-control unit 91 performs a notification effect for notifying that the number of medals acquired by the player when a payout of medals occurs during the AT or that the net increase at the AT has reached a specified number. Execution processing is executed (Sp6).

  In addition to the above, the sub-control unit 91 establishes an AT (assist time) lottery condition (winning a cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay which is a lottery target for internal lottery) Perform AT lottery. In the AT lottery, it is determined whether to give the number of navigation stocks. When it is decided to give the navigation stock, it is also decided how much the navigation stock number is given. The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which the AT can be controlled.

  In ART (AT in RT0, RT2, RT3), the winning probabilities of the navigation target combination are set so that the average net increase in medals per game is two by executing the navigation effect. Therefore, in ART, the expected value of the number of medals given to the player with respect to the number of medals used by the player becomes 2 or more, and the number of medals given to the player can be larger. On the other hand, in RT1 or RT4 in a state that is not controlled by the AT, that is, in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the winning combination is such that the average net increase in medals per game is less than 0 by not performing the navigation effect. Is set. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the expected value of the number of medals given to the player with respect to the number of medals used by the player is less than 0, and the number of medals used by the player can be larger. Hereinafter, ART may be simply referred to as AT.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the AT lottery is greater than when the AT lottery is performed until 50 games have elapsed after the AT is over (after the AT is over when the Navistock becomes 0). (That is, the probability of giving the navigation stock) is set to a high probability. Therefore, it is an AT pullback zone for up to 50 games after the end of the AT, and an AT villa can be expected by AT pullback. In addition, it is not necessary to change the winning probability of the AT lottery as in the present embodiment, and the timing and period can be appropriately set even when changing.

  When the number of navigation stocks of 1 or more is determined in the AT lottery, the sub-control unit 91 stores an AT flag indicating the AT and the number of navigation stocks in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. Based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, the sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control to AT, and specifies the remaining number of navigation stocks. When the AT flag indicating AT is set, it is possible to control the AT by consuming one navigation stock number.

  When the number of navigation stocks is acquired when the AT flag indicating AT is set, the number of navigation stocks acquired this time is added to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag.

  For example, when an AT lottery is performed when an AT flag indicating that the AT is set, the AT flag corresponding to the result of the AT lottery is updated. To update to the AT flag corresponding to the AT lottery result, for example, the navigation stock number specified from the AT lag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c is added to the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the current AT lottery result. It may be possible to rewrite the number of navigation stocks to an AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stocks, and any method may be used as long as the current AT flag according to the result of the AT lottery can be specified.

  The sub-control unit 91 manages the control to the AT based on the AT flag that is set according to the result of the AT lottery when it is normal / RT1 to RT4.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls to AT when the AT flag is specified from the AT flag in normal / RT1. That is, when navigation stock remains, AT control is started. In the period from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks.

  When it is controlled by the AT, and when it is controlled from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the start condition for the AT by consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks is satisfied, and 50 games are consumed. Until then, the RT is controlled to an ART that is RT and AT having a high winning probability of the re-gamer. When the number of navigation stock is consumed, it is updated to the AT flag indicating the number of navigation stock subtracted by 1.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 controls to be non-AT when the remaining number of games is 0 in ART. At this time, if the number of navigation stocks indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to the AT flag indicating that it is not AT. In other words, a series of AT termination conditions are satisfied when the AT flag for controlling from AT to non-AT is 0.

  When it is specified from the AT flag when it is controlled to be non-AT that it is not AT, it is not controlled again by the AT and the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, when the normal / RT0 or the normal / RT2 is selected, there is a high possibility that the transition outcomes are aligned, and the possibility of being controlled to the normal / RT1 is increased.

  On the other hand, if the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT flag when controlled to non-AT is 1 or more, the number of navigation stocks is consumed, and the control is continued to 50 games AT. Then, the number of navigation stocks is also 0, and the number of navigations is also 0, so that the AT ends.

  If the AT flag specifies that the sub-control unit 91 is AT, the sub-control unit 91 performs a navigation effect by winning a navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state. The navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state is replay GR1-6 when it is normal / RT1, replay GR11-16, replay GR21-25 when it is normal / RT0, and replay GR31 when it is normal / RT2. ~ 36. Further, in normal / RT0 to RT3, the push order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  The sub-control unit 91 controls the AT by setting an AT flag when the AT lottery is won and executing an AT control process (not shown) when it is normal RT1-4.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls to the AT when the AT flag is specified from the AT flag in normal / RT4 or normal / RT1. During the period from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the AT is controlled without counting the number of games at the AT, and the navigation effect can be executed.

  When it is controlled by the AT and when it is controlled from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the start condition to ART (assist replay time) is satisfied. Then, during a predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment), control is performed to the normal RT0, RT2, RT3 AT (that is, ART) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is high. The sub-control unit 91 clears the AT flag and controls to non-AT when the number of remaining games becomes 0 in ART.

  When it is controlled to non-AT, the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, when normal / RT0 or normal / RT2 or normal / RT3, the possibility of matching the transition outcomes increases, and the possibility of being controlled to normal / RT1 increases.

  In the AT control process, the sub-control unit 91 executes the navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state when the AT flag specifies the AT. The navigation target combination corresponding to the game state is replay GR1-6 when normal RT1, normal replay GR11-16, replay GR21-25 when normal RT0, normal RT2 or normal RT3 In some cases, it is replay GR31-36. Further, in normal / RT0 to RT3, the push order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  As a navigation effect when winning the replays GR1 to GR6, a push order for winning the promoted replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR1. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR2, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR3 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 4 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR5, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 6 is won, a message such as “Right Middle Left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when the replays GR11 to 16 are won, a push order for winning the promoted replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR11. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 12, a message such as “Middle right and left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 13, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 14, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 15 is won, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 16 is won, a message such as “right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect when winning replays GR21 to GR25, a push order for winning a special replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 21. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 22 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 23 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 24 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 25 is won, a message such as “Right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As a navigation effect (excluding RT3) when the replays GR31 to 36 are won, the push order for winning the SP replay according to the winning situation is notified. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 31 is won. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 32 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 33 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 34, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when winning the replay GR 35, a message such as “middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as a navigation effect when the replay GR 36 is won, a message such as “right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as a navigation effect when one of the push order bells is won, a push order for reliably winning the right-down bell or the middle bell is notified. For example, when winning the left bell, the left reel is stopped as the first stop reel, so that the right falling bell can be reliably won, so “left!” For stopping the left reel as the first stop reel. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the middle bell is won, the middle bell can be surely won by stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel, so “medium!” For stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Also, when the right bell is won, the middle bell can be reliably won by stopping the right reel as the first stop reel, so “right!” For stopping the right reel as the first stop reel. A message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect in the present embodiment, a message reminiscent of an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified in the same mode regardless of the type of the navigation target role. For this reason, the player can operate in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player without being conscious of the type of the winning navigation target combination.

  The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and any mode may be used as long as the player can distinguish according to the winning situation. In addition, the navigation effect is not limited to what is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  Then, by executing the navigation effect, it is possible to make the promotion replay winning, the special replay winning, the SP replay winning, the bell winning selected intentionally, and avoid the falling replay winning.

[Net increase count processing]
Next, the net increment counting process (Sp5) executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the net increment counting process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT flag is set (Sc1). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not a bet amount has been set by determining whether or not a medal insertion command has been received from the main control unit 41 (Sc2). If the bet number is not set, the process proceeds to Sc3. When the bet number is set, the number of medals corresponding to the bet number (three in this embodiment) is subtracted from the net increment counter for counting the net increment (Sc3). In Sc4, it is determined whether or not a medal has been paid out based on the winning number command from the main control unit 41 (Sc4). If no medal payout has occurred, the process is terminated. If a medal payout has occurred, the medal payout number is added to the net increment counter, and the process ends (Sc5).

[Notification effect execution processing]
Next, the notification effect execution process (Sp6) executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the notification effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not a medal payout has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. Determine (Sq1). If no medal payout has occurred, the process is terminated. If a medal has been paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sq2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a prescribed number (whether or not the prescribed number is exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Sq3). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to 1000, 2500, 5000, and 10,000.

  When the net increase reaches the specified number, the specified number arrival display indicating that the net increase has reached the specified number is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sq4). The specified number reaching display can be displayed in various forms such as display of the number of acquired characters (for example, “1000 OVER!”), Graph display, character type and color display, and the like. After the specified number arrival display is performed, the process is terminated.

  If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the acquired number indicating that the medal has been paid out (that is, the player has acquired the medal) (Sq5). The acquired number display can be displayed in various forms, for example, display of the acquired number of characters (“8 GET!”, Etc.), display by graph, display by character type and color, and the like. After displaying the acquired number, the process is terminated.

[Specific Example of First Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 22, the reel rotation state and the display content of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow on the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, it is assumed that the AT game is started in a state where the net increase in the number of ATs is 0 and the middle bell is won. At this time, the liquid crystal display 51 displays “TOTAL 0” at the top of the screen as the net increase number display 300 in AT. In addition, “BELL!” Is displayed in the center of the screen as the winning combination display 301 indicating the winning combination won in the internal lottery. A push order display 302 is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The push order display 302 indicates that the stop switch is operated in the order indicated by the numerals. In the drawing, as the push order display 302, the order of middle → right → left is shown.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net increase number display 300 becomes “8 sheets”. In addition, “8 GET !!” is displayed as the acquired number display 303 (see Sq5 in FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 22B, it is assumed that the AT game is started with a net increase of 999 at the AT and the middle bell is won. At this time, “TOTAL 999” is displayed as the net increase number display 300 at the AT. In addition, “BELL!” Is displayed as the winning combination display 301. A push order display 302 is also displayed.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net increase number display 300 becomes “1007 sheets”. In addition, “1000 overs!” Is displayed as the specified number arrival display 304 (see Sq4 in FIG. 21).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, it is informed that a payout has occurred, and when the net increase reaches a specified number when the payout has occurred, the net increase is not performed without notifying that a payout has occurred. Informs that has reached the specified number. Therefore, the player can simultaneously recognize that the payout has occurred in conjunction with the net increase reaching the specified number. In addition, it is possible to make a more impressive impression that the net increase has reached the specified number by effectively notifying only that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  In the first embodiment, it is set that medals are paid out as the first event, and that the net increase reaches the specified number as the second event. Therefore, it is possible to make a more impressive impression of reaching the specified number of net increases related to the medal payout that is advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number. Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  In the first embodiment, only the specified number reaching display is performed by the liquid crystal display device 51 when the net increase reaches the specified number. However, the fact that the medal has been paid out by other devices such as the speakers 53 and 54 has been described. You may alert | report separately from a regular notice display. That is, when the second event occurs, the occurrence of the first event may not be notified by the same means.

[About the second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. Detailed description of the parts described in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

[Notification effect execution processing]
In the second embodiment, a notification effect execution process different from that shown in FIG. 21 is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the notification effect execution process according to the second embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a prize number command has been received from the main control unit 41, whereby a medal is paid out. It is determined whether or not it has occurred (Ss1). If no medal payout has occurred, the process is terminated. If a medal has been paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Ss2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a prescribed number (whether or not the prescribed number is exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Ss3). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to 1000, 2500, 5000, and 10,000.

  When the net increase reaches the specified number, a medal acquisition sound indicating that the medal has been paid out (that is, the player has acquired the medal) is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the net increase is specified. The specified number arrival display indicating that the number has been reached is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sq4). The medal acquisition sound can take various forms such as a message output (such as “medal GET!”) Or a unique sound effect. In addition, the specified number arrival display can be displayed in various forms such as display of the number of acquired characters by characters (such as “1000 OVER!”), Display by graph, and display by character type and color. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying the specified number of arrivals, the process ends.

  When the net increase has not reached the specified number, a medal acquisition sound is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as in the case of Ss4, and the medal is paid out (that is, the player has acquired a medal). The obtained number display is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sq5). The acquired number display can be displayed in various forms, for example, display of the acquired number of characters (“8 GET!”, Etc.), display by graph, display by character type and color, and the like. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying the number of acquired coins, the process ends.

[Specific Example of Second Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 24, the reel rotation state and the display content of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow on the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, it is assumed that the AT game is started in a state where the net increase in the number of ATs is 0 and the middle bell is won. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, “TOTAL 0” is displayed at the top of the screen as the net increase number display 400 in AT. In addition, “BELL!” Is displayed in the center of the screen as the winning combination display 401 indicating the winning combination won in the internal lottery. A push order display 302 is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The push order display 402 indicates that the stop switch is operated in the order indicated by the numerals. In the figure, as the push order display 402, the order of middle → right → left is shown.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net increase number display 400 becomes “8”. Further, “8 GET !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see Ss5 in FIG. 23). Further, “8 GET !!” is displayed as the acquired number display 403 (see Ss5 in FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIG. 24B, it is assumed that an AT game is started with a net increase of 999 at AT and a middle bell is won. At this time, “TOTAL 999” is displayed as the net increase number display 400 at the AT. In addition, “BELL!” Is displayed as the winning combination display 401. A push order display 402 is also displayed.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net increase number display 400 becomes “1007”. Further, “8 GET !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see Ss4 in FIG. 23). Also, “1000 overs!” Is displayed as the specified number arrival display 404 (see Ss4 in FIG. 23).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase does not reach the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred, and the payout is performed. When the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number and notifies the speakers 53 and 54 that the payout has occurred. Therefore, even when notifying that each of different events has occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

  In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number. Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  In the second embodiment, it is set that medals are paid out as the first event, and the second event is set so that the net increase reaches the specified number. Therefore, even when notifying that different events related to the payout of medals advantageous to the player have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

[About the third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. Detailed description of the parts described in the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

[AT game number on lottery]
In the third embodiment, an AT game number addition lottery for determining whether or not to add an AT game number is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the AT game number increase lottery process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the reel acceleration information command from the main control unit 41 has been received, thereby ending the game. When the game is started, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sj2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not an additional condition is satisfied (Sj3). The additional condition is, for example, a case where a winning combination is won by internal lottery. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the additional condition is satisfied by determining whether or not any winning combination is won based on the winning number command from the main control unit 41. If the addition condition is not satisfied, the process is terminated.

  When the additional condition is satisfied, the additional lottery is executed (Sj4). The extra lottery is executed with a probability corresponding to the type of winning combination won in the internal lottery. When the extra lottery is completed, the number of extra games determined in the extra lottery is set in the AT game number counter (Sj5). Next, an additional effect flag indicating execution of the additional effect is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process is terminated (Sj6). The number of added games is also stored in the RAM 91c so that the number of added games determined in the added lottery can be identified. The number of added games is selected from a plurality of types of games, but at least 10 games are added.

[Notification effect execution processing]
In the third embodiment, a notification effect execution process different from that shown in FIG. 21 is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the notification effect execution process according to the third embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the T flag is set (St1). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not a medal has been paid out by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41 (St2).

  When the medals are paid out, the number of games at AT (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as the number of AT games) is added based on whether or not the additional effect flag is set at Sj6 in FIG. It is determined whether or not (St3).

  When the number of AT games is added, a medal acquisition sound indicating that a medal is acquired is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and an AT game number addition display indicating that the number of AT games is added is displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51 (St4). The medal acquisition sound can take various forms such as a message output (such as “medal GET!”) Or a unique sound effect. In addition, the number of AT games added can be displayed in various forms such as, for example, display of the number of acquired characters (such as “10 games added!”), Graph display, and character type and color display. After the output of the medal acquisition sound and the AT game number addition display, the addition effect flag is cleared and the process is terminated.

  If the additional effect flag is not set and it is determined that the number of AT games is not increased, a medal acquisition sound indicating that a medal has been paid out (that is, the player has acquired a medal) In addition to outputting from the speakers 53 and 54, the obtained number display indicating that the medal has been paid out (that is, the player has won the medal) is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (St5). The acquired number display can be displayed in various forms, for example, display of the acquired number of characters (“8 GET!”, Etc.), display by graph, display by character type and color, and the like. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying the acquired number, the additional effect flag is cleared and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in St2 that no medals have been paid out, it is determined whether or not the number of AT games has been increased based on whether or not the additional effect flag is set in Sj6 of FIG. (St6). If the additional effect flag is not set and the number of AT games is not increased, the process ends.

  When the number of AT games is added, an AT game number added sound indicating that the number of AT games is added is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the number of AT games indicating that the number of AT games is added is added. The display is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (St7). The AT game number extra sound can be in various forms such as a message output (such as “10 extra games!”) Or a unique sound effect. After outputting the AT game number extra sound and displaying the AT game number extra display, the extra effect flag is cleared and the process ends.

[Specific Example of Third Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 27, the reel rotation state and the display content of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow on the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the middle bell wins during AT, “8 GET !!” is displayed as the acquired number display 500 (see St5 in FIG. 26). In addition, “8 GET !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see St5 in FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the normal replay is won and the lottery is won during the AT, the number of AT games added 501 is displayed as “10 games added!” (See St7 in FIG. 26). In addition, “add 10 games!” Is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as an additional sound for the number of AT games (see St7 in FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when winning a bell (either one of the left bell, middle bell, or right bell) during the AT and winning the lottery, the AT game number addition display 501 is displayed as "Add 10 games!" Is displayed (see St4 in FIG. 26). In addition, “8 GET !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see St4 in FIG. 26).

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when a payout occurs and the number of AT games is not added, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred, and no payout occurs. When the number of AT games is added, the liquid crystal display 51 and speakers 53 and 54 notify that the number of AT games has been added, and when the payout occurs and the number of AT games is added, the liquid crystal display 51 To notify that the number of AT games has been added and notify that the payout has occurred through the speakers 53 and 54. Therefore, even when notifying that each of different events has occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

  In the third embodiment, since at least 10 games are added, the number of medals obtained by adding the number of AT games is larger than the number of medals obtained by one winning. Therefore, notification of the added game number has a higher notification priority. Then, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the addition of the number of AT games, which has a higher priority of notification to the player than the occurrence of payout. Therefore, it can be more impressed that the number of AT games is increased.

[Modification 1]
Next, Modification 1 of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. In the first modification, a notification effect indicating that the net increase exceeds the specified number is executed. Also, a net increase is counted until 50 games are consumed after the AT ends. When the net increase reaches the specified number by being controlled by AT again until 50 games are consumed, the notification effect is not executed for the specified number that has already been the target of the notification effect. Further, when the notification effect overlaps with the continuation effect indicating whether or not the AT continues, execution of the notification effect is restricted. Then, when the medals are paid out again, the notification effect is executed.

  Then, the specified number arrival display of FIG. 21 in the first embodiment and the specified number arrival display of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment can be implemented as notification effects in the first modification. In addition to the notification effect execution process of FIG. 26, the first modification can be further implemented for the third embodiment. Hereinafter, specific processing will be described for Modification 1, but detailed description of the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[Notification effect execution processing]
Next, the notification effect execution process in the modification 1 is demonstrated. The notification effect execution process in the first modification is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the notification effect execution process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a medal payout has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. Determine (Sh1). If no medal payout has occurred, the process is terminated. If a medal has been paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sh2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a prescribed number (whether or not the prescribed number is exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Sh3). If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the process is terminated.

  When the net increase number reaches the specified number, it is determined whether or not the informed flag corresponding to the reached specified number is set (Sh4). That is, it is determined whether a notification effect for notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number has already been executed with respect to the specified number that has been reached. When the notification effect for the reached specified number has already been executed and the notification flag is set, the process is terminated.

  When the notification effect for the reached specified number has not yet been executed and the notification completion flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect executed in Sg4 of FIG. 29 is being executed (Sh5). If the continuation effect is being executed, the process ends. If the continuation effect is not being executed, a notification effect for notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number is executed (Sh6). The notification effect is executed by displaying a message or character indicating that from the liquid crystal display 51. When the notification effect is executed, the notification completion flag corresponding to the notified prescribed number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process is terminated (Sh7). At this time, the specified number used for comparison with the next net increase is selected, and the selected specified number is stored and set.

  The net increase is cleared when the number of games after the end of AT reaches 50 games. Then, for example, the net increase decreases after the AT ends, and the net increase is less than the specified number, but before the number of games after the end of AT reaches 50 games, it is controlled again by the AT and the net increase is again the specified number. When the net increase reaches the specified number again before the net increase is cleared, such as when the notification effect is reached, the notification effect is performed again for the specified number once the notification effect is performed by performing the determination of Sh4. Is regulated. This can prevent the player from impressing that the number of medals has decreased after the AT has ended.

  When the execution of the continuation effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the determination of Sh5 is performed to execute the continuation effect without executing the notification effect, and the notification effect is again paid out and the net increase is defined. Since it is executed when the number reaches the number, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the medals are paid out does not collapse, so that the player may feel uncomfortable The game can be progressed as if not. It should be noted that the execution of the continuation effect and the execution of the notification effect are that the execution timings of both effects overlap in the same game, both when the execution period overlaps and when all overlap. Including.

[Continuous production execution processing]
Next, the continuous effect execution process in the modified example 1 will be described. The continuous effect execution process in Modification 1 is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the continuous effect execution process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the game has started by determining whether or not a reel acceleration information command from the main control unit 41 has been received. (Sg1). If the game has not started, the process ends. When the game is started, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sg2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the number of games until the end of AT is within 5 games (Sg3). If the number of games until the end of AT is within 5 games, continue to notify whether or not the AT continues (that is, whether or not the navigation stock remains and is controlled by the AT again after the AT ends) An effect is executed (Sg4).

  The continuation effect is an effect having a story that is performed over five games. Then, as a result of the production, it is notified whether or not the AT continues in the final game of the AT. Specifically, for example, a state in which a teammate character and an enemy character battle is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a sound corresponding to this is output from the speakers 53 and 54. Then, in the final game of AT, the teammate character wins when the AT continues, and when the AT does not continue, the enemy character wins and the production ends.

  In this way, the continuation effect that notifies the possibility that the navigation stock different from the medal payout is given is executed, and the continuation effect is controlled by the AT by winning the cherry that may be given the navigation stock. Since it is sometimes executed, it is possible to attract the attention of a player who is paying attention to the possibility that navigation stock is given. In particular, since the continuous effect is executed as the continuous effect, the player's attention can be attracted more.

  Further, since the continuation effect is an effect having a story property, it is possible to attract the attention of a player who is paying attention to the continuation effect having a story property.

[Modification 2]
Next, Modification 2 of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. In the modification 2, the notification effect which shows that the net increase exceeded the regulation number is performed. Also, a net increase is counted until 50 games are consumed after the AT ends. When the net increase reaches the specified number by being controlled by AT again until 50 games are consumed, the notification effect is not executed for the specified number that has already been the target of the notification effect. Further, when the additional effect for notifying the number of additional games of AT and the notification effect overlap, the execution of the additional effect is restricted. Then, when the additional condition is satisfied again, the additional effect is executed.

  Then, the specified number arrival display of FIG. 21 in the first embodiment and the specified number arrival display of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment can be implemented as notification effects in the second modification. In addition, the AT game number addition display of FIG. 26 in the third embodiment can be implemented as an addition effect in the second modification. Specific processing for Modification 2 will be described below, but detailed description of the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[Notification effect execution processing]
Next, the notification effect execution process in the modification 2 is demonstrated. The notification effect execution process in Modification 2 is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the notification effect execution process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a medal payout has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. Determine (Sm1). If no medal payout has occurred, the process is terminated. If a medal has been paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sm2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. When the AT flag is set, whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a prescribed number (whether or not the prescribed number is exceeded in this embodiment). ) Is determined (Sm3). If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the process is terminated.

  When the net increase number reaches the specified number, it is determined whether or not the notified flag corresponding to the reached specified number is set (Sm4). That is, it is determined whether a notification effect for notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number has already been executed with respect to the specified number that has been reached. When the notification effect for the reached specified number has already been executed and the notification flag is set, the process is terminated.

  When the notification effect for the reached specified number has not yet been executed and the notification flag has not been set, the notification effect for notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number is executed (Sm5). The notification effect is executed by displaying a message or character indicating that from the liquid crystal display 51. When the notification effect is executed, the notification completion flag corresponding to the notified prescribed number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process is terminated (Sm6).

[Addition production execution processing]
Next, an extra effect execution process in the second modification will be described. The extra effect execution process in the second modification is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the extra effect execution process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the game has ended by determining whether or not the reel stop position 3 command from the main control unit 41 has been received. Determine (Sr1). If the game has not ended, the process ends. When the game is over, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sr2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. If the AT flag is not set, the process is terminated. If the AT flag is set, it is determined in Sj6 of FIG. 25 whether or not the additional effect flag is set (Sr3). If the additional effect flag is not set, the process ends.

  When the extra effect flag is set, it is determined whether or not a medal payout has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41 (Sr4). If no medal payout has occurred, the process proceeds to Sr6. When a medal payout occurs, it is determined whether or not the notification effect by Sm5 in FIG. 30 is executed (Sr5). If the notification effect is executed, the process ends. In Sr6, an extra effect is executed (Sr6). The extra effect is executed by displaying the extra number of games from the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the additional effect is not executed because the notification effect is being executed, when the additional effect is executed when the additional condition is established and the additional lottery is performed, the added game is performed at that time. Only the number may be notified, or the number of additional games that have not been notified because the additional effect has not been executed may be added and notified.

  As described above, when the execution of the addition effect overlaps with the execution of the notification effect, the notification effect is executed without executing the additional effect, and the additional effect is executed again when the additional condition is established and the addition lottery is performed. Therefore, even if the execution time of the extra effect is changed, the flow that the extra effect is executed when the extra condition is satisfied does not break down, so that the game can proceed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable it can.

  In addition, as a specific effect, an additional effect that notifies the possibility that an additional game number of ATs different from the payout of medals is given is executed, and since the additional effect is executed when a watermelon is won, an additional game number is given Attracting the attention of a player who is paying attention to the possibility of being played.

[Specific Examples in Modification 1 and Modification 2]
Next, specific examples in Modification 1 and Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of restricting the notification effect again. FIG. 33 shows a specific example in which the specific effect is executed without executing the notification effect when the notification effect and the specific effect are executed. FIG. 34 shows a specific example in which the notification effect is executed without executing the specific effect when the notification effect and the specific effect are executed.

[Specific example of restricting notification effects]
As shown in FIG. 32, the notification effect is executed when the net increase reaches 1000 which is the prescribed number during AT (Sh3, Sh6 in FIG. 28). At this time, a notification completion flag is set (Sh7 in FIG. 28). After this, even if the AT ends, the count of the net increase continues until 50 games after the AT ends. Then, as shown in the non-AT section in the figure, it is assumed that the AT ends and the net increase decreases. Next, it is assumed that an AT lottery is won within 50 games after the end of AT and the AT is controlled again. Then, it is assumed that the net increase reaches 1000, which is the specified number, in the AT again. At this time, since the notification effect for the specified number of 1000 sheets has already been executed, the execution of the notification effect is restricted (determined as Y in Sh4 in FIG. 28). For this reason, the notification effect is not executed.

[Specific example to prioritize specific effects]
As shown in FIG. 33A, it is assumed that the 50th game, which is the final game of the first set of ATs (the AT started by the first navigation stock consumption), is started. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, 994 pieces are displayed at the top of the screen as the net increase number display 200 at the AT, and the fact that the 50th game is displayed at the top of the screen as the game number display 201 at the AT, respectively. . Further, from the liquid crystal display 51, as a continuation effect, a state in which the teammate character 202 and the enemy character 203 battle is displayed at the center of the screen. Further, a push order display 204 indicating the push order as a navigation effect is displayed at the bottom of the screen. In the push order display, the push order is indicated by numbers. In the figure, the push order display 204 shows the order of middle → right → left.

  Then, it is assumed that the middle level bell wins by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. When the middle bell wins, eight medals are paid out, so the net increase number display 200 is updated to a display indicating 1002. At this time, the net increase has exceeded the prescribed number of 1000, but the execution of the continuous effect is duplicated, so the notification effect is not executed and the continuous effect is executed (determined as Y in Sh5 in FIG. 28). In the continuation effect, the appearance that the teammate character 202 has won the enemy character 203 is displayed, and it is notified that the AT will continue.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), when one piece of Navistock is consumed and the second set of ATs is started, the net increment display 200 is updated to a display showing 999 cards by subtracting three bets. The The game number display 201 is updated to a display indicating the first game. At this time, it is assumed that the push order display 204 is displayed. Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated as displayed and the middle bell wins. When the middle bell wins, eight medals are paid out, so the net increase number display 200 is updated to a display indicating 1007 sheets. At this time, the net increase number exceeds the specified number of 1000 sheets, and the continuous effect is not executed, so the notification effect is executed (Sh6 in FIG. 28). A message 205 indicating that the prescribed number of 1000 has been exceeded as a notification effect is displayed in the center of the screen.

[Specific example of giving priority to notification effects]
As shown in FIG. 34A, for example, it is assumed that the 25th game of AT is started. At this time, 999 pieces are displayed at the top of the screen as the net increase number display 200, and the fact that the 25th game is displayed at the top of the screen is displayed as the number of games display 201 at AT. The liquid crystal display 51 displays a message 206 indicating that a watermelon (a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon) has been won. At this time, an extra lottery for determining the number of extra games of AT is executed (Sj4 in FIG. 25).

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the right-down watermelon wins. When the right-down watermelon wins, five medals are paid out, so the net increase number display 200 is updated to a display indicating 1004. At this time, since the net increase has exceeded the prescribed number of 1000, the execution of the notification effect overlaps with the execution of the additional effect, but the additional effect is not executed and the notification effect is executed (Sm5 in FIG. 30, FIG. 30). 31. Sr5 of 31: Y determination) Then, a message 205 indicating that the prescribed number of 1000 has been exceeded as a notification effect is displayed in the center of the screen.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), it is assumed that the 26th game of AT is subsequently started. The net increase number display 200 is updated to a display indicating 1001 by subtracting three bets. The game number display 201 is updated to a display indicating the 26th game. The liquid crystal display 51 displays a message 206 indicating that a watermelon (a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon) has been won. At this time, an extra lottery for determining the number of extra games of AT is executed (Sj4 in FIG. 25).

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the right-down watermelon wins. When the right-down watermelon wins, five medals are paid out, so that the net increase number display 200 is updated to a display indicating 1006. At this time, since the notification effect is not executed, the additional effect is executed (Sr6 in FIG. 31). Then, a message 207 indicating that 10 games have been added as an additional effect is displayed in the center of the screen.

[Modification 3]
Next, Modification 3 of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third modification, the display of the number of acquired medals in the AT is added to the AT and changed to the game number display.

  Then, the specified number arrival display and acquired number display in FIG. 21 in the first embodiment and the specified number arrival display and acquired number display in FIG. 23 in the second embodiment and the acquired number display in FIG. By changing the display to the number of games, the third modification can be applied to the first to third embodiments. Although specific processing will be described below for Modification 3, detailed description of the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

  First, the timer interrupt process (sub) in Modification 3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the RAM 91c (step Sd1). If an unprocessed command is not stored (step Sd1; No), the process ends. When an unprocessed command is stored (step Sd1; Yes), each rendering device is controlled based on the oldest command. That is, the sub control unit 91 controls each effect device in the order of the received commands.

  The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the command is an internal winning command (a command corresponding to the winning number command in the above embodiment) (step Sd2). When the command is not an internal winning command (step Sd2; No), the sub-control unit 91 executes a process according to the type of command (step Sd17) and ends the process. When the command is an internal winning command (step Sd2; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 stores a winning flag in the RAM 91c (step Sd3) and determines whether the AT flag is on (step Sd4). The AT flag is a flag indicating whether or not the AT state is set in the RAM 91c. The AT flag is turned on when in the AT state, and turned off when not in the AT state.

  When the AT flag is off (step Sd4; No), the sub control unit 91 performs an AT lottery process (step Sd5). After the AT lottery process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT is won by the lottery process (step Sd6). If the AT is won (step Sd6; Yes), the AT flag of the RAM 91c is turned on (step Sd7), and the number of games (the number of won games) given to the AT game number counter set in the RAM 91c is added ( Step Sd8), the process proceeds to the next process. In Modification 3, the number of games (the number of games added to the AT game number counter) given when winning an AT in the AT lottery process is 50 games (50 games after shifting to the RT0 state). Is set in advance.

  When the AT flag is on (step Sd4; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 performs an AT continuous lottery process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add an additional number of games (the number of consecutively won games and the amount of privilege). A lottery corresponding to the extra lottery in the above embodiment is performed (step Sd9). When the sub-control unit 91 executes the AT continuous lottery process, as shown in FIG. 36, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is given for the cherry or watermelon combination (step Se1). Here, the cherry role is specifically “BB + Cherry”, “BB + Cherry + 1”, “RB + Cherry”, “RB + Cherry 1”, “Cherry”, “Cherry + 1”, It means “bell 1 + watermelon + cherry (middle bell)” (see FIG. 7). In addition, the watermelon role is specifically “BB + watermelon”, “BB + watermelon + 1”, “RB + watermelon”, “RB + watermelon + 1”, “watermelon”, “watermelon + 1”, "Bell 1 + watermelon + cherry (middle bell)".

  When the internal winning combination of the cherry or watermelon combination (step Se1; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 continues to win the AT (additional game) using the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the cherry or the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the watermelon. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a number (step Se2).

  Here, the continuous lottery table at the time of cherry win and the continuous lottery table at the time of watermelon win will be described. In the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the cherry, a ratio (continuous winning rate) in which the number of additional games is given when the internal winning command is the cherry role is set. In this embodiment, when the internal winning command is the role of cherry, the number of additional games is given as ± 0, that is, the rate of non-winning is 50 [%] and the rate of +5 game is 5 [%]. The rate of +10 games is 20 [%], the rate of +30 games is 15 [%], the rate of +50 games is 5 [%], the rate of +100 games is 4.5 [%], and +300 games Is set to 0.5 [%].

  Further, in the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the watermelon, a ratio is set in which the number of AT extra games is given when the internal winning command is a watermelon role. In this embodiment, when the internal winning command is a watermelon role, the ratio of the added game number is 90 [%] for ± 0 (non-winning), 5 [%] for the +5 game, The rate of +10 games is 0 [%], the rate of +30 games is 0 [%], the rate of +50 games is 3 [%], the rate of +100 games is 1 [%], and the rate of +300 games is 1 [%] is set.

  Returning to FIG. 36, after the AT continuous lottery by winning the cherry or watermelon combination, or when the internal winning is not performed for the cherry or watermelon combination (step Se1; No), the sub-control unit 91 is set in the RAM 91c. With reference to the AT medal acquisition number counter, it is determined whether or not a specific game history has been reached in which the medal acquisition number (medal net increase) after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number (step Se3).

  In order to control in this way, the sub-control unit 91 of the modification 3 uses the medal acquisition number as history data based on the winning determination command (command indicating the result of winning determination) received from the main control unit 41. The AT medal acquisition number counter stored in the RAM 91c counts (counts) the medal acquisition number (medal net increase) from the start of AT based on the history data. In the third modification, 100, 250, 500, 1000,... Are set as the predetermined number. Therefore, in the third modification, for a plurality of the predetermined number of sheets, the difference number of sheets up to the next predetermined number (100-0 = 100 [sheets], 250-100 = 150 [sheets], 500-250 = 250 [sheets], 1000−500 = 500 [sheets]) is increased in advance. In Modification 3, since the average net increase in medals in the RT0-3 state during AT control is 2 or more, for example, the first 100 cards have 50 games or less (100 / 2 = 50 [G]), the next 250 cards will be reached in 75 games or less ((250-100) / 2 = 50 [G]).

  Further, in the third modification, the average net increase in medals in the RT0-3 state during AT control is 2 or more, and since AT can shift to the RT0-3 state, at least 50 games can be digested. The rate at which the number of acquired medals after reaching the RT0-3 state at the time reaches 100 is higher than the rate at which 100 medals are not reached. Further, in the present embodiment, the average net increase in medals in other gaming states until the transition to the RT0-3 state during AT control is 1 or more, and the AT is the AT game number counter until the transition to the RT0-3 state. Don't digest the remaining game numbers. For this reason, the rate at which the number of acquired medals reaches 100 after the start of AT is higher than the rate at which 100 medals are not reached.

  The sub-control unit 91 ends the AT lottery process when the number of acquired medals after starting AT does not reach the predetermined number (step Se3; No). On the other hand, when the number of medals acquired after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number (step Se3; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT is to continuously win using the continuous lottery table when the predetermined number is acquired. (Step Se4), and the AT lottery process is terminated.

  Here, the continuous lottery table when the predetermined number of sheets is acquired will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 15C, in the continuous lottery table when 100 cards are acquired, the ratio of the number of games added to the AT when the number of acquired medals after starting AT becomes 100 is shown. Is set. In the modified example 3, as the ratio of the added game number when the number of acquired medals after starting AT becomes 100, the ratio of ± 0 (non-winning) is 0 [%], +5 game The rate is 40 [%], the rate of +10 game is 40 [%], the rate of +30 game is 10 [%], the rate of +50 game is 5 [%], and the rate of +100 game is 4 [%] , The ratio of +300 games is set to 1 [%]. Therefore, in the third modification, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT becomes 100, the continuous lottery table at the time of 100 acquisition is set so that the AT is continuously selected and the number of added games is +5 or more. Has been.

  In addition, for example, in the continuous lottery table when 250 cards are acquired, a ratio is set in which the number of AT extra games is given when the number of acquired medals after the start of AT becomes 250. In the third modification, the rate of +0 (non-winning) is 40 [%] and +5 games as the rate of adding the number of added games when the number of acquired medals after starting AT is 250. The rate is 10 [%], the rate of +10 game is 30 [%], the rate of +30 game is 10 [%], the rate of +50 game is 5 [%], and the rate of +100 game is 4 [%] , The ratio of +300 games is set to 1 [%]. Although illustration is omitted, even when the number of medals obtained after starting AT becomes 500, 1000, etc., the same 500 as in the continuous lottery table at the time of 250 acquisition shown in FIG. A continuous lottery table at the time of acquisition, a continuous lottery table at the time of acquisition of 1000 sheets, and the like are provided. Therefore, in the third modification, when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT becomes 250, 500, 1000,... Are set respectively. In the third modification, the continuous lottery table at the time of acquiring each predetermined number other than the continuous lottery table at the time of acquiring 100 sheets exemplifies the case where the percentage of non-winning is not 0%. As with the lottery table, it may be 0% (an additional game number may be given at a rate of 100%).

  Returning to FIG. 35, after the AT continuous lottery process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT continuation is won by the continuous lottery process (step Sd10). When the AT continuation is won (step Sd10; Yes), the added game number given to the AT game number counter set in the RAM 91c is added (step Sd11). In the third modification, in the AT lottery process and the AT continuous lottery process, when the winning flag is “CHERRY + 1”, it is set in advance so that AT winning / AT continuous winning is performed at a rate of 100%.

  If the AT continuation is not won (step Sd10; Yes), or after winning the AT continuation and adding the number of games to the AT game number counter, the sub-control unit 91 refers to the RAM 91c and the winning flag is set to “Normal It is determined whether or not the flag indicates “replay” (step Sd12). When the winning flag is a flag indicating “normal replay” (step Sd12; Yes), the sub control unit 91 executes an internal push order navigation determination process (step Sd13). The internal push order navigation determination process is a process for determining whether to notify the internal push order specified from the received internal winning command.

  In the third modification, the main control unit 41 outputs a special signal externally on the condition that the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”. The external device that has received the special signal can display the number of times controlled to the AT state (AT number) so that the player can recognize it. The AT number at this time is required to be an accurate value.

  Here, as in the slot machine 1 of the third modification, in the case of a configuration in which the AT is terminated on the condition that the predetermined number of games is consumed, for example, “Transition to AT state-special role winning / winning-to bonus state” The AT state may be interrupted by the transition to the bonus state or the like, such as “Transition—Bonus end—Transition to the AT state again”. At this time, if the configuration is such that the special signal is externally output when the AT state is simply started, the special signal will be externally output again even after the AT state is interrupted. There is a possibility that the special signal is output to the outside twice and the AT number to be displayed is two times even though the actual AT number is one time.

  For this reason, in the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to report the internal pressing order according to the game situation. That is, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the internal push order when the special signal needs to be output externally by making the internal push order correct, and notifies the internal push order when the special signal does not need to be output externally. do not do. However, even if the internal pressing order is not notified, the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3” by the player's operation, and a special signal may be output. In order to avoid such a situation, the sub-control unit 91 does not need to output a special signal, and when the value of the continuous correct counter may be “3”, the internal control sequence Informs the different pressing order (incorrect answer pressing order).

  Hereinafter, the situation determined by the sub-control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 makes a transition to the AT state for the first time after winning the AT and the gaming state is the RT0-3 state (at the time of the first hit AT). Is in the RT0-3 state (at AT after power interruption) ", it is determined that a special signal needs to be output to the outside.

  In addition, even if the gaming state is in the RT0-3 state, the sub-control unit 91 determines that “if the gaming state is in the RT0-3 state after the AT is interrupted and the gaming state is in the RT0-3 state (at AT after interruption)” In the case of “transition to RT0-3 state after order mistake (at RT after push order mistake)”, it is determined that it is not necessary to output a special signal externally.

  For these determinations, a flag based on the number of AT digestion games can be used. In this case, for example, the sub-control unit 91 turns on the flag set in the RAM 91c when the AT digestion is started and the number of AT digestion games is 0 (at the time of the first hit AT). While the flag is on, the sub-control unit 91 keeps reporting the internal push order, turns off the flag on condition that the value of the continuous correct counter is “3”, and reports the correct answer of the internal push order. Limit. That is, when the flag is turned on, it means that the special signal needs to be output to the outside, and when the flag is turned off, it means that it is not necessary to output the special signal to the outside.

  Further, when a power interruption occurs, the flag may be turned on according to whether the AT state is in the power interruption process or the activation process, or whether the gaming state is the RT3 state. Since the flag is turned on after the power interruption, the sub-control unit 91 continues to notify the internal push order until the value of the continuous correct counter becomes “3”, and when the value of the continuous correct counter becomes “3”, The main control unit 41 outputs a special signal to the outside.

  In order to control in this way, it is assumed that a continuous correct counter is set in the RAM 91c in the sub-control unit 91 as well as in the main control unit 41. The update timing of the continuous correct answer counter may include the value of the continuous correct counter included in the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 may update the same value by receiving the command. The sub control unit 91 may autonomously update by executing the same process as the process of the main control unit 41.

  After the internal push order navigation determination process, after turning on the AT flag, or when the AT is not won (step Sd6; No), the sub-control unit 91 stores in the ROM 91a based on the AT flag and the winning flag. The stored effect pattern is selected (step Sd14). Here, when the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at the selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, that is, the winning flag, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the production pattern is registered in the production table stored in the ROM 91a, and the sub-control unit 91 refers to the selection rate from the production table according to the winning flag when receiving the internal winning command, An effect pattern is selected according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c. In addition, when the production pattern is already set in the RAM 91c, for example, during the continuous production, the sub control unit 91 proceeds with the process according to the production pattern without selecting a new production pattern.

  After the effect pattern is selected, the sub control unit 91 refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91a, acquires the control pattern, and sets the acquired control pattern in the RAM 91c (step Sd15). In the control pattern table, various patterns corresponding to command types are registered for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns. The effect pattern is, for example, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51, a lighting mode of the effect effect LED 52, or the like. In accordance with this control pattern table, the sub-control unit 91 controls the production according to the progress of the game.

  If the sub-control unit 91 receives a new command during execution of the effect control triggered by the reception of the command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect control being executed, and the effect corresponding to the newly received command. Execute the control. That is, even if the production control is not completed, the production can be canceled and the production control based on the new command can be executed. For example, even when an effect based on the command is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, if the player starts the game before the effect is completed, the effect is canceled.

  Control of effects being executed according to commands accompanying operations that are essential when a player starts a game, such as BET commands received when the MAX BET switch 6 is operated, and internal winning commands received when the start switch 7 is operated May be canceled. By adopting such a configuration, when the player wants to start the next game quickly, it does not cause troublesome thoughts. In addition, for a specific effect, a configuration may be adopted in which control of the effect is continued when any command is received. In this case, when the above-described specific effect occurs, the player can have a sense of expectation.

  And the sub-control part 91 performs control of an effect according to an effect pattern (step Sd16), and complete | finishes a process. As described above, since the production pattern is selected according to the selection rate, even if the same internal winning command that is the result of the same internal lottery is received, the production pattern is not always the same.

  In Modification 3, when selecting an effect pattern based on various commands (steps Sd14 and Sd17), the sub-control unit 91 executes an effect pattern selection process for selecting an effect pattern to be executed on the liquid crystal display 51. To do. When executing the effect pattern selection process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT flag is on as shown in FIG. 37 (step Sf1). If the AT flag is off (step Sf1; No), the sub-control unit 91 selects a normal effect pattern (step Sf2) and ends the process. On the other hand, when the AT flag is on (step Sf1; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 selects the number notification effect shown in FIG. 38A (step Sf3) and acquires the AT medal set in the RAM 91c. With reference to the number counter, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired medals (net medal increase) after the start of AT has reached a predetermined number (step Sf4).

  Here, the number notification effect 501 is an effect of notifying the medal acquisition number (medal net increase) from the start of AT counted by the AT medal acquisition number counter. As shown in FIG. 38A, the number notification effect 501 of the present embodiment is, for example, “TOTAL +17 sheets in a display mode that is inconspicuous for the player when the number of acquired medals after the start of AT is 17 sheets. "Is an effect of displaying an image of a character string" "on the liquid crystal display 51. For example, a person image is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal display 51 and is displayed smaller than the person image at the lower right end of the liquid crystal display 51.

  Returning to FIG. 37, when the number of medals obtained after the start of AT reaches a predetermined number (step Sf4; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 sets the number of additional games and the predetermined number by the AT continuous lottery process shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a common number (step Sf5). For example, when the number of added games is +10 and the predetermined number is 100, “1” and “0” are common numbers. For example, when the number of added games is +5 and the predetermined number is 100, there is no common number.

If there is a common number between the added game number and the predetermined number (step Sf5; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 selects the partial winning pattern continuous winning notification effect shown in FIG. 38B (step Sf6). .
Here, the continuous winning notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the AT continuous lottery process has been executed and the number of additional games has been given (whether or not the AT continuous winning has been won). In addition, the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern is an effect pattern that destroys a number that is not common to the predetermined number of additional games when there is a number common to the predetermined number of games and the number of additional games. This is an effect of notifying whether or not the AT is continuously won by changing the number of added games. In addition, although the continuous winning notification effect of each pattern of the present embodiment is a continuous effect that is executed until one game is finished, it may be a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, the partial destruction pattern continuous winning notification effect of the present embodiment is, for example, a liquid crystal display 51 that displays the number of characters notification effect 502 that displays an image of a character string “TOTAL +100 sheets”. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 with a partial destruction effect 503 in which the character string “0” of “TOTAL +100” is overwritten with an explosion image, and then the character string “+10” is left. This is a continuous effect in which an additional notification effect 504 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image of the character string “addition + 10G” by changing other character strings in the state. In the added notification effect 504 of the present embodiment, other character strings are changed without moving the character string “+10”, but other character strings are changed while moving the character string “+10”. May be. Although illustration is omitted, the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern of the present embodiment is a case where the AT continuous lottery is not won, that is, when the number of added games is ± 0 game, Display a partial destruction effect by overwriting the character string of “+10” of “TOTAL +100” with an explosion image on the liquid crystal display 51, and then display an image of the character string such as “Add on ± 0G! An additional notification effect displayed on the display 51 is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if there is no common number between the added game number and the predetermined number (step Sf5; No), the sub-control unit 91 selects the continuous winning notification effect of the all-destroy pattern shown in FIG. (Step Sf7). Here, the continuous winning notification effect of the all-destroy pattern means that when there is no common number between the predetermined number and the number of added games, the predetermined number is added to the number of games with an effect pattern that destroys all the predetermined numbers. It is an effect that informs the AT whether or not the winning is continued. As shown in FIG. 38C, for example, the continuous destruction notification effect of the all destruction pattern according to the present embodiment is displayed as an explosion image after the number notification effect 502 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. This is a continuous effect in which an overlay notification effect 506 is displayed in which the overwritten all destruction effect 505 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and then the character string is changed to display an image of the character string “addition + 5G” on the liquid crystal display 51. is there.

  Returning to FIG. 37, after selecting the continuous winning notification effect or when the number of medals acquired after the start of AT has not reached the predetermined number (step Sf4; No), the sub-control unit 91 performs the cherry or watermelon combination. It is determined whether or not the AT continuous lottery process is executed due to the internal winning, and the AT continuous winning is determined (step Sf8). When the sub-control unit 91 has not won the AT continuation in the cherry or watermelon combination (step Sf8; No), the sub-control unit 91 ends the process, and in the case of the AT continuation in the cherry or watermelon combination (step Sf8; Yes), the continuous winning notification effect 507 after completion of all the effects shown in FIG. 38D is selected, and the process ends.

  Here, the continuous winning notification effect 507 after the end of all the effects is an effect that notifies the AT that the game has been continuously won by the cherry or watermelon winning combination that is executed at the end of all the effects after the end of one game. . As shown in FIG. 38D, the continuous winning notification effect 507 after the completion of all the effects of the present embodiment is, for example, an image of a character string “added + 10G” when the AT is continuously won by the cherry role winning. And an image of cherry on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Next, specific control of the slot machine 1 according to Modification 3 will be described.

  Sub-control when the winning combination of cherry or watermelon in the AT state or when the number of medals earned after starting AT reaches a predetermined number (100, 250, 500, 1000, etc.) The unit 91 performs AT lottery processing using the continuous lottery table. Also, the sub-control unit 91 performs the number notification effect 501 shown in FIG. 38A to notify the medal acquisition number after the start of AT, and when the medal acquisition number reaches a predetermined number, the continuous winning notification effect To notify the AT continuation winning by notifying the number of games added. Here, when there is a common number between the predetermined number and the number of added games, the sub-control unit 91 executes the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern shown in FIG. When there is no common number, a continuous winning notification effect of the all-destroy pattern shown in FIG. 38C is executed. Then, regardless of whether or not the number of medals acquired is a predetermined number, the sub-control unit 91 performs FIG. ) Is performed to notify that the number of games has been added by winning the AT continuously by the cherry or watermelon winning combination.

  Then, in the third modification configured as described above, the count of the net increase in medals is configured to end when a predetermined period (for example, 50 games) elapses after the AT ends. Then, the net increase in medals reaches a predetermined number (corresponding to the prescribed number in the above embodiment), and the net increase is notified by a notification effect (display of “+100 sheets!” In FIGS. 38A and 38B). Thereafter, when the net increase in medals decreases and the net increase in medals reaches a predetermined number again, execution of the notification effect is restricted. As a result, the net increase decreases after the AT ends, and the net increase again falls below the specified number, but before the number of games after the end of the AT reaches 50 games, it is controlled again by the AT and the net increase becomes the specified number again. It is possible to prevent the player from being impressed that the number of medals has decreased after the AT has ended.

  In the third modification, when the net number of medals reaches a predetermined number, a notification effect (display of “+100 sheets!” In FIGS. 38A and 38B) and a continuous notification corresponding to the specific effect are provided. It is also possible to perform the continuous notification effect without overlapping the effects uniformly, without executing the notification effect, and to execute the notification effect when a medal payout occurs thereafter. As a result, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the medals are paid out does not break down, so that the player proceeds with the game so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Can do.

  In the third modification, when the net number of medals reaches a predetermined number, a notification effect (display of “+100 sheets!” In FIGS. 38A and 38B) and a continuous notification corresponding to the specific effect are provided. It is also possible to configure so that the notification effect is executed without overlapping the effects uniformly and without executing the continuous notification effect, and then the continuous notification effect is executed when the net increase reaches a predetermined number. As a result, even if the execution time of the continuous notification effect is changed, the flow that the continuous notification effect is executed when the net increase reaches the predetermined number does not break, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Can proceed.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub control unit 91 executes the number notification effect 501 for notifying the number of acquired medals after starting AT, as shown in FIG. To do. Then, the sub-control unit 91 executes the AT continuous lottery process when the number of medals obtained after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number, and notifies whether or not the number of additional games has been awarded by the AT continuous winning. The continuous winning notification effect is executed. At this time, in Modification 3, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (C), the sub-control unit 91 adds an additional notification effect 504 that notifies the number of games added from the number notification effect 502 that notifies the predetermined number. , 506 is executed as a continuous winning notification effect.

  By doing so, the AT continuous lottery is performed not only when winning the cherry role or watermelon role but also when the number of medals earned since the start of the AT reaches the predetermined number, so the cherry role or watermelon role is won It is possible to increase the possibility that the AT continuous lottery will be performed rather than the slot machine that performs the AT continuous lottery only at times, and the AT will continue even if the player does not win the cherry role or watermelon role with a low winning rate Because you can expect, the fun of the game will improve. Further, the slot machine 1 according to the modified example 3 has a relationship between the number of acquired medals and the number of added games more than the slot machine that does not notify the number of added games with an effect pattern that changes from the number notification effect to the continuous winning notification effect. Since it is easy for the user to recognize, it is possible to effectively notify that the AT has been won by the fact that the number of medals acquired after the AT has started reaches a predetermined number.

  In particular, according to the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, the number of medals obtained after the start of AT as an advantageous event obtained by the player, that is, the net increase in medals, is a target for determining whether or not the AT continuous lottery is performed. It has become.

  In this way, the player can not only get a sense of satisfaction with the game by increasing the number of medals earned since the start of the AT, but also by adding a predetermined number of medals to the extra game As the number of medals can be expected to increase, the number of medals earned can be expected to increase. Even if the number of sheets reaches a predetermined number, the interest of the game can be improved as compared with the slot machine in which the AT continuous lottery process is not executed.

  In Modification 3, the target for determining whether or not the AT continuous lottery is performed is the net increase in medals after the start of AT, but other events may be used as long as the player obtains an advantageous event. For example, the determination target of whether or not to perform AT continuous lottery may be the number of medals to be paid out after the start of AT. In addition, for example, the longer the period of the AT state, the more advantageous for the player and the satisfaction with the game can be obtained. It is good also as a number, digested Navi stock number, digested Navi number (the number of executions of a navigation effect). Here, the navigation stock indicates an amount (number of sets) that can be controlled by the AT due to the large number. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks, the AT is controlled while the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (for example, 40), and the navigation effect can be executed during that time. For this reason, it can be said that the greater the determined number of navigation stocks, the higher the degree of advantage for the player because the AT is controlled over a longer period. When determining the number of digested navigation stocks as a determination target, for example, when digesting a predetermined number of navigation stocks, it is determined whether or not to continue AT by adding new navigation stocks at a rate of 50% Can be considered. In addition, when the number of digested navigations is set as the determination target, for example, in a configuration in which the number of executable navigation effects is given 20 times when winning an AT, a new navigation effect is created at a rate of 50% after a predetermined number of navigation effects are executed. It is conceivable to determine whether or not to continue the AT by giving the executable number of times.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub-control unit 91, when the number of medals acquired after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number, when there is a common number between the predetermined number and the number of added games 38B, the partial winning pattern continuous winning notification effect shown in FIG. 38B is executed, and a part of the character string image (“+10” image) common to the number notification effect 502 and the additional notification effect 504 is left. The destruction effect 503 is executed.

  This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the number of acquired medals reaching the predetermined number and the number of added games than a slot machine that does not execute the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern. can do.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 wins the cherry role or watermelon role in the game in which the number of added games is given when the number of medals obtained after the AT starts reaches a predetermined number. When the number of added games is also given, after the continuous winning notification effect is executed, the continuous winning notification effect 507 after completion of all the effects shown in FIG. 38D is executed.

  By doing in this way, the number of additional games is increased by the fact that the number of medals obtained after the start of AT has reached a predetermined number than the slot machine that does not execute the continuous winning notification effect after the end of all the effects after executing the continuous winning notification effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player cannot recognize that the privilege is also given by winning the cherry or watermelon role in the game to which is given.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 gives the number of additional games for continuing the AT when the number of medals obtained after the AT starts becomes a predetermined number during the AT control. Determine whether or not.

  By doing this, the player will be more interested in the number of medals earned after the start of AT than the slot machine that does not give an additional game number because the number of medals earned after the start of AT becomes a predetermined number. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 has a predetermined number of sheets of 100, 250,... The average number of medals won not change in the RT3 state during AT control. For this reason, the average number of games from 0 to 100 medals after the transition to the RT3 state after starting AT is 2/3 times the average number of games from 100 to 250 (100 / 150 = 2/3 [times]). In addition to the average number of games, for example, the average number of times of push order bells from 0 to 100 is also 2/3 times the average number of times of push order bells from 100 to 250. . As a result, the expected value (average game number, average navigation number, etc.) until the number of medals obtained after AT starts reaches the first predetermined number (100) reaches the next predetermined number (250). It is 1.5 times the expected value. In this embodiment, the expected value until the first predetermined number is reached is the highest, and the expected value until the predetermined number is reached as the predetermined number increases to 250, 500, 1000,. Is set to be low.

  In this way, when the number of acquired medals reaches 100 after the start of AT, the number of acquired medals reaches from 100 to 250, from 250 to 500, and from 500 to 1000. The AT continuous lottery is performed after reaching the predetermined number in a short period of time. For this reason, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the smaller the predetermined number is, the easier it is to reach the predetermined number, and it is easy to give an additional number of games. It can be expected that the number of games will be given. In addition, since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment becomes difficult to reach the predetermined number as the predetermined number increases, the expectation and joyfulness for the addition of the number of games added by the player is excessively increased. Can be prevented.

  In particular, according to the slot machine 1 of the modified example 3, the sub-control unit 91 acquires 100 cards so that when the number of medals acquired after starting AT reaches 100, the added number of games is always given +5 games or more. The time continuous lottery table is set in advance. In the present embodiment, the average net increase in medals per game in the RT states 0 to 3 in the AT state is 2 or more, and the number of games awarded when winning the AT is 50 games after the transition to the RT3 state. Therefore, the probability that the number of acquired medals after starting AT is 100 is set high.

  In this way, the player can expect that the number of medals won after the start of AT will be 100, and the number of games will be added and the AT will continue. The fun of the game is improved over slot machines that are unlikely to get 100 cards or slot machines that do not receive an additional number of games even when the number reaches 100.

  In the third modification, there is a possibility that the number of medals won after the start of AT does not reach 100, and the AT is not necessarily continued, but the number of games to be added is definitely reached by surely reaching 100. May be provided so that AT is continued. For example, the sub-control unit 91 may perform control so that the AT is continued until the number of acquired medals reaches 100 after starting the AT without setting the number of games when the AT is won. In addition, for example, when AT is selected, a condition such as “the number of remaining games is 0 game and the net increase in medals is 100 or more” is set, and the number of medals earned after starting AT is surely reached 100 You may control to AT until it becomes. In this case, it is necessary to control the sub-control unit 91 so that the AT can be continued if the remaining number of games is 0 and the medal net increase has not reached 100. In this way, when the AT is started, the player can be confident that the number of acquired medals will be 100 and that the number of games will be given and the AT will continue. The game is more interesting than the slot machines that may not be extended.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the modification 3, the RT0 to 3 states are set to the advantageous RT, and the AT in the RT3 state is more advantageous for the player than the AT in the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state. The average net increase in medals is set to be high. Then, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to add the number of games by counting the number of medals obtained after the AT starts regardless of the gaming state (normal state / RT1 to RT3 state, SB state). . Further, the sub-control unit 91 is set so that the remaining number of games of the AT game number counter is not consumed until the state shifts to the RT0-3 state. Even in the state, if the AT is controlled, the average net increase in medals is set to be 1 or more.

  In this way, if the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state until the transition to the RT0-3 state is controlled by the AT, the remaining number of games of the AT is not consumed and the number of acquired medals increases (net increase) Therefore, the number of acquired medals after starting AT is easier to reach than the slot machine in which the number of acquired medals is not counted for the AT in the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state in which the number of medals can be increased. Since it is easy to be granted and the player can expect to receive an additional number of games, the interest of the game is improved.

[Modification 4]
Next, Modification 3 of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 44. In the fourth modification, the timing at which the insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning is when the automatic BET by the replay winning is completed or when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started (or started). .

  And also in 1st Embodiment-3rd Embodiment, when various replays win, it is the same as that of the modification 4 in the timing of insertion or settlement, and the modification 4 in the 1st embodiment-the 3rd embodiment. Can be implemented. Although specific processing will be described below for Modification 4, detailed description of the same parts as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[BET processing]
First, the BET process executed by the main control unit 41 in Sd1 of the game process shown in FIG. 7 will be described. 39 to 41 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the main control unit.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared (S10), and a prescribed number according to the gaming state (the upper limit number in the present embodiment). (3 in any gaming state) is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 (S11), and whether or not the replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the next game (game started from now) is a replay game (S12).

  When it is determined in S12 that the next game (game started from now) is a replay game, a rip freeze process for generating a rip freeze at the time of a bell lip winning is executed (S13). The reply freeze process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the rip freeze process is completed, in S14, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 and the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to. 3), that is, whether or not the number of bets serving as a game start condition is set (S15), and if the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, the process returns to S14. When the value of the BET counter becomes the specified number and the setting of the bet number by replay winning is completed, the process proceeds to S16. After the value of the BET counter is added, the main control unit 41 executes processing for sequentially lighting the 1BETLED 14, 2BETLED15, and 3BETLED16 according to the value of the BET counter. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a process of lighting the replaying LED 20 and the start valid LED 18 (waiting LED 19 during waiting) after setting of the betting number after the replay winning is completed.

  In S16, it is determined whether or not the replay won in the previous game is a normal lip, 7 complete lip, and 7 fake lips 1 to 5 (these replays are collectively referred to as a first replay in the following). . Note that the first replay may be only a normal rep among replays composed of only the same symbol. Whether or not it is the first replay is specified from the set replay game flag. When it is determined in S16 that the first replay has been made, in S17, the bet number is added to 3 (because the replay winning state is 3 bets), and a BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 A BET command indicating that there is a BET sound to be performed (for convenience, it is indicated as “BET command (with BET sound)” in S17; the same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S16 that it is not the first replay, a BET command (S18) indicating that the bet number is added by 3 in S18 and that there is no BET sound that the sub-control unit 91 does not output a BET sound. For convenience, “BET command (no BET sound)” (the same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer. When it is determined that it is not the first replay, when the first replay is a normal lip, a 7-round lip, and a 7-flip lip 1-5, it is determined that the player has won a bell lip 1-5. When it was done. Hereinafter, replays other than the first replay are also referred to as second replays, and here, bell lip 1 to 5 correspond. The second replay may include 7 fake lips 1 to 5 composed of a combination of symbols including different symbols, and includes 7 rips that serve as an AT lottery opportunity to be described later. Also good.

  The BET command set in S17 and S18 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Thereby, on the side of the sub-control unit 91, a bet sound is output every time the bet number is set after the first replay winning, whereas the bet number is set after the second replay winning. Does not output a BET sound. This makes it easier for the player to notice the first replay prize, while making it difficult for the player to notice the second replay prize.

  In S19, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter, which is the value of credit stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41, is 50, which is the upper limit value. When it is determined in S19 that it is the upper limit value, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main controller 41 (S20), and the process proceeds to S22. In S20, when the insertion disable flag is set, processing for turning off the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed. Note that when the BET counter is set to the prescribed number by the second replay winning, without making the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 in S20, for example, it is determined YES in S37 to be described later, or the rip freeze ends. Or after a credit command (with a BET sound) corresponding to 3 BETs is output, the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

  If it is determined in S19 that the value is not the upper limit value, that is, if it is determined that credits can be inserted, the process proceeds to S21. If it is determined in S12 that the game is not a replay game, the process directly proceeds to S21.

  In S21, the setting before waiting for input is performed, and the process proceeds to S22. In the setting before waiting for insertion, when the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41, the insertion prohibition flag is cleared, and a medal can be inserted. For this reason, after the replay winning, the bet number setting is completed before the bet number setting is completed and the setting for the bet number is not accepted, and the bet number setting is completed. The medals inserted after the setting before waiting is effectively received and credits are added. The main control unit 41 turns on the insertion request LED 17 after the setting before waiting for insertion and clears the insertion prohibition flag in S21, and sets the BET switch valid LED 21 when the bet number can be set. Execute the process to light up. When the BET counter is set to the prescribed number by the first replay winning, only the insertion request LED 17 is turned on in S21. When the BET counter is set to the prescribed number by the second replay winning, the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned on in S21. Alternatively, after a credit command (with a BET sound) corresponding to 3 BETs is output, the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

  In S22, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. If it is determined in S22 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side ( S23), the process proceeds to S25, and if it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is used as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Is prohibited (S24), and the process proceeds to S25.

  In S25, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on. If the setting key switch 37 is on, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (S26). If the value of the BET counter is 0 in S26, the confirmation start command is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S27), and the setting confirmation process (S28), that is, the setting confirmation state is entered. The confirmation start command set in S27 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Moreover, after the setting confirmation process in S28 is completed, the process returns to S22. If the setting key switch 37 is not on in S25, or if the value of the BET counter is not 0 in S26, the process proceeds to S30.

  In S30, it is determined whether or not the detection result of the inserted medal sensor 31 is an appropriate detection result and whether or not the insertion medal has been detected, that is, whether or not there is an insertion medal flag indicating that the insertion medal has been detected. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in S30, the process proceeds to S45, and if the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the inserted medal flag is cleared (S31), and the non-insertable flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. Whether or not a medal can be inserted is determined based on whether or not a medal can be inserted (S32). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to S45.

  If the medal can be inserted in S32, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (S33). If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, a BET command (with BET sound) indicating that the bet number is incremented by 1 and that the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 is sent as a normal command. The trust buffer is set (S34), the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (S35), and the process returns to S22. The BET command set in S34 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Thereby, when the bet number is set by inserting medals, a BET sound is output on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in S33, it is determined in S36 whether or not the second replay has been won in the previous game. Whether or not it was the second replay is specified from the replay game flag. If it is determined in S36 that the second replay has not been won in the previous game, a credit command indicating that the credit control value is output by the sub-control unit 91 and the value of the credit counter after one addition is displayed in S38. (In S38, “credit command (normal)” is shown for convenience. The same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and the credit counter value in which the credit value is stored in the RAM of the main control unit 41 in S40. 1 is added. The credit command set in S38 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  If it is determined in S36 that the second replay has been won in the previous game, it is determined in S37 whether or not a predetermined number of BET sounds have been output. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the credit command shown in S39 is output three times as many as the specified number. When the bet amount is set after the second replay winning, since the BET command (no BET sound) is output as shown in S18, the BET sound is not output in the sub-control unit 91. For this reason, after the second replay winning, after the bet number is set, when a medal is inserted and credited, a process for outputting the BET sound up to a specified number of times is performed.

  In S37, when a predetermined number of BET sounds have not been output, a credit command indicating the value of the credit counter after 1 addition and indicating that the sub-control unit 91 outputs a credit sound in S39 (in S39, for convenience) "Credit command (with BET sound)" is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and 1 is added to the value of the credit counter that stores the credit value in the RAM of the main control unit 41 in S40. To do. The credit command set in S39 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). On the other hand, when a predetermined number of BET sounds have already been output in S37, the process proceeds to S38, and a credit command (normal) is set in the normal command transmission buffer. As a result, when adding credits by inserting medals after the second replay winning, on the sub-control unit 91 side, BET sounds are output for up to the third sheet, and credit sounds are output for the fourth and subsequent sheets. The On the other hand, when adding credits by inserting medals when it is not after the second replay winning, a credit sound is output from the first sheet on the sub-control unit 91 side. As the next step of S36 and S37, after executing S40, the corresponding S38 or S39 processing is performed, so that a credit command indicating the current value after being added by S40 as the value of the credit counter is displayed in S38. Or you may make it set in S39. In addition, since a predetermined number of bets are set after the release of the rip freeze at the second replay winning, a command for outputting a predetermined number of BET sounds as a credit command (with a BET sound) is issued in S39. It may be set to output a predetermined number of BET sounds.

  In S41, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to S22, and if the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 in S42, and the process returns to S22.

  In S45, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating a rising edge of the start switch 7 is set. Furthermore, the rising edge is set only when any switch is turned on and all the switches are turned off. In S45, in addition to whether any switch is turned on or not, the other edge is set. Whether or not the switch is OFF is also determined.

  If it is determined in S45 that the operation of the start switch 7 has not been detected, or if another switch that has operated the start switch 7 is also operated, the process proceeds to S50, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid. If detected, the process proceeds to S46, and the rising edge is cleared. In S47, referring to the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41, whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number, that is, whether or not a bet number serving as a game start condition is set. Determine whether.

  If the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number in S47, the process returns to S22. If the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number, the flow disable solenoid is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 in S48. 30 is set to the off state, and the insertion of a new medal is prohibited using the medal flow path as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, and the setting at the start of the game is performed in S49. Thereby, even if a medal is inserted until the setting is made before waiting for insertion in S21 in the BET processing after the next game after the game is started, the medal payout opening 9 is not accepted. Will be paid out. Then, after S49, the BET process is terminated and the process proceeds to Sd2 in FIG.

In S50, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the single BET switch 5 is set. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in S50, the process proceeds to S51. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the process proceeds to S65 in FIG. 41, and the rising edge is cleared.

  In S66, the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number. If the value of the BET counter is a specified number in S66, the process returns to S22. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 in S67. If the value of the credit counter is 0 in S67, the process returns to S22. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in S67, a BET command (with BET sound) indicating that the bet number is incremented by 1 and that the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 in S68. Is set in the buffer for normal command transmission. In S69, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1. In S70, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1, and the process returns to S22. The BET command set in S68 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). Thus, when the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 5, a BET sound is output on the sub control unit 91 side. After the second replay winning, when it is determined YES in S66, the same determination as S37 is performed, and when the prescribed number of BET sounds are not output, the same processing as S39 is performed. , BET sound may be output.

  In S51, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the MAXBET switch 6 is set. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in S51, the process proceeds to S52, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the process proceeds to S75 in FIG. 41 to clear the rising edge.

  In S76, the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S76, the process proceeds to S80, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 in S77. If the value of the credit counter is 0 in S77, the process proceeds to S80. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in S77, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter in S78, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter in S79, and the process returns to S76.

  In S80, it is determined whether or not the BET counter is added. If the BET counter is not added, the process returns to S22. In addition, when the BET counter in S80 is added, not only the addition in S79 but also the addition in S14 after the rip freeze is canceled by the MAXBET switch 6 operation. On the other hand, if the BET counter has been added, a BET command (BET sound) indicating that the bet number corresponding to the number added in S81 has been added and that the BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 is output. Yes) is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and the process proceeds to S22. The BET command set in S81 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (main). As a result, when the bet amount is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the BET sound is output for the set bet amount on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In S52, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the settlement switch 10 is set. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in S52, the process returns to S22. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the process proceeds to S53 and the rising edge is cleared. In S54, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41.

  If it is not determined in S54 that the game is a replay game, it is determined in S56 whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0. If the value of the BET counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S57, and the hopper motor 34 is driven to drive the BET counter. Control for paying out the medals for the value stored in (that is, control for returning the medals used for setting the bet number and setting the value of the BET counter to 0), the start of paying out medals, and the betting number adjustment The betting number adjustment process for setting the payout start command to notify the normal command transmission buffer is performed. After the betting amount adjustment process in S57, in S58, the insertion impossible flag set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared, and the process returns to S22. As a result, when the betting amount is settled by operating the settlement switch 10 in a state where the betting amount is set, not after the replay winning, the sub-control unit 91 displays that the betting amount is being settled. And a sound corresponding to the betting amount adjustment is output.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S54 that the game is a replay game, or when it is determined that the value of the BET counter is 0 in S56, the value stored in the credit counter by driving the hopper motor 34 in S59. Control for paying out medals for the minute (that is, control for returning medal memorized as credits and setting the value of the credit counter to 0), notifying the start of paying out medals, and credit settlement in the replay game A betting number settlement process is performed to set a payout start command for notifying whether there is a credit settlement when there is a bet amount or not in the normal command transmission buffer. After the betting amount adjustment process in S57, in S58, the insertion impossible flag set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared, and the process returns to S22. Thereby, when the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 in the replay winning, only the credit settlement is performed without performing the betting number settlement, and the credit after the replay winning is performed on the sub-control unit 91 side. A message indicating that the account is being settled is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the credit settlement after the replay winning is output. Further, when the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 when the value of the BET counter is 0, the sub-control unit 91 side indicates that the credit settlement when the value of the BET counter is 0 is being performed. In addition to being displayed, a sound corresponding to credit settlement when the value of the BET counter is 0 is output.

[Rip freeze processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control content of the rip freeze process executed by the main control unit 41 in S13 of the BET process. The rip freeze process is performed when it is determined that the game is a replay game, that is, after a replay winning in the previous game. In S85, it is determined whether or not the replay won in the previous game was the second replay of bell lip 1-5. When it is determined that the bell lip is not 1 to 5, the rip freeze processing is terminated without generating a freeze.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the bell lip 1 to 5 is determined, the timing for setting the bet amount by the replay winning or the start switch 7 until it is determined YES in any of S89 to S92 and the freeze release condition is satisfied. Processing is performed to generate a freeze (lip freeze) that delays the timing for enabling. In S86, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is the upper limit value of 50. When it is determined in S86 that the value is not the upper limit value, credits can be added. Therefore, in S87, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal flow path can be inserted on the hopper tank side path. State. In S88, a process for lighting the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed. Thereby, in particular, MAXBET operation, medal insertion, etc. can be promoted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S86 that the value of the credit counter is 50, which is the upper limit value, credit addition is impossible, and the process proceeds to S89 without performing the process of S87 and the like. As a result, despite the fact that the credit counter is 50, the inserted medal will flow down to the hopper tank side, while preventing the occurrence of a problem such that neither the credit addition nor the bet number is added by the medal. Can do.

  In S89, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the rip freeze. When it is determined in S89 that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the lip freeze, the rip freeze release condition is satisfied.

  If it is determined in S89 that a predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the rip freeze, it is determined in S90 whether or not the player has performed a MAXBET operation using the MAXBET switch 6. When it is determined in S90 that the player has performed a MAXBET operation, the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S90 that there is no MAXBET operation by the player, in S91, the inserted medal sensor 31 in which the medal inserted from the medal inserting unit 4 is arranged on the hopper tank 34a side with respect to the flow path switching solenoid 30 is provided. It is determined whether or not it is detected by a sensor arranged on the most upstream side among the plurality of sensors (that is, a sensor capable of detecting the inserted medal first (this sensor is hereinafter also referred to as a specific sensor)). The passage of the medal is detected by the specific sensor when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on in S87. When it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, the rip freeze release condition is satisfied. Even when it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, the insertion of a medal has not yet been detected by another sensor, and the detection result by the insertion medal sensor 31 is not an appropriate detection result. The flag is not set.

  If it is not determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, it is determined in S92 whether or not there has been a credit settlement operation using the settlement switch 10 by the player. When it is determined in S92 that the player has made a credit checkout operation, the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied. In addition, after the freeze is canceled by the credit settlement operation, the result of the determination in S52 of FIG. 40 is YES and the process proceeds to S59, so that the credit settlement process is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S92 that there is no credit settlement operation by the player, the process proceeds to S89.

  After the freeze release condition is satisfied, in S93, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is in the on state, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the rip freeze processing is ended. In the reply freeze process, the process of S93 is performed. Thus, for example, even when a rip freeze occurs when the credit counter is 49 and a plurality of medals are inserted at once, the freeze release condition is satisfied by detecting the first of them by a specific sensor. After that, immediately after the flow path switching solenoid is turned off in S93 and the freeze-freeze processing is ended, the first medal is further detected by another sensor, and the detection result by the insertion medal sensor 31 is appropriate. When the detection result is set and the insertion medal flag is set, YES is determined in S30 of FIG. 40, the credit counter is updated to 50 in S40, YES is determined in S19 of FIG. 39, and the insertion disable flag is set in S20. Since the flow path switching solenoid is turned off, the second and subsequent medals out of the plurality of medals It is discharged from Le payout opening 9. The plurality of sensors included in the inserted medal sensor 31 are detected by other sensors after the first medal is detected by the specific sensor and the detection result by the inserted medal sensor 31 when a plurality of medals are inserted at a time. Is shorter than the time required for the second medal to reach the flow path switching solenoid 30 after the first medal is detected by the specific sensor. Are arranged as follows. For this reason, when the credit 50 is reached by inserting the first medal, the flow path switching solenoid is always turned off when the second and subsequent medals reach the flow path switching solenoid 30. The medals after the first can be paid out from the medal payout exit 9. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that credits are not added and returned even though medals are inserted.

  On the other hand, when a rip freeze occurs when the credit counter is less than 49 and a plurality of medals are inserted at once, the freeze release condition is established by detecting the first of them by a specific sensor. After that, the flow path switching solenoid is immediately turned off in S93, but immediately after that, it is determined NO in S19 of FIG. 39 and the setting before waiting for input is performed in S21, and the flow path switching solenoid is turned on. Since the on state is maintained until the credit 50 is reached, the second and subsequent medals out of the plurality of medals are also taken in (added to the credit 50) and added to the credit. Thereby, the convenience when a medal is inserted during the rip freeze can be improved.

[Example of timing when medal insertion or settlement is allowed]
Next, the timing at which medal insertion or settlement is allowed after the game is over will be described. 43 (a) to 43 (d) are diagrams for explaining an example of the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the game is ended by executing the BET process shown in FIGS. 39 to 41. It is.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a medal is not paid out without winning a small role. If no small role winning has occurred, the game ends without paying out, and thereafter, the process of S8 in FIG. 11, the process of S1 for the next game, and the processes of S10 to S12 of FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, thereby allowing insertion or settlement of medals as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43 (b) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after winning a small role and paying out medals. If a small role winning has occurred, the game ends after the payout has been made, and then the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 in FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, thereby allowing insertion or settlement of medals as shown in FIG. 43 (b).

  FIG. 43 (c) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the normal lip winning. If a normal lip winning has occurred, the game ends without paying out, and then the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 of FIG. In addition to the processing, after the bet number setting is completed and after it is determined in S19 that credit is possible, the processing from S21 is executed, as shown in FIG. 43 (c). Medals can be inserted or settled.

  FIG. 43 (d) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after winning the bell lip. If a Bellip winning has occurred, the game ends without payout, and then the processing of S8 of FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 of FIG. 42 is executed, the freeze-freeze processing shown in FIG. 42 is executed, and the freeze-free control is performed until the freeze-free release condition is satisfied. During this period, as shown in S87 of FIG. 42, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on to permit insertion of a medal for releasing the freeze, and a credit settlement operation or a MAXBET operation for releasing the freeze. Is also allowed. When the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied, after it is determined that credits are possible in S19 in FIG. 39 after the betting number setting is completed, the processing in S21 and subsequent steps is executed, which is shown in FIG. 43 (d). Thus, normal medal insertion or settlement is allowed.

  During Rip Freeze, medal insertion and credit settlement operation for freezing are allowed, and normal medal after Rip Freeze is canceled and bet number is set in conjunction with medal insertion and credit settlement operation during Rip Freeze. Is charged or settled. Even during the rip freeze, when the value of the credit counter has already reached 50, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not turned on in S87 of FIG. 42. It will be allowed later.

[Allowable timing for input / settlement after replay winning]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d), an example where the timing at which insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning is the completion of the automatic BET by the replay winning However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning may be when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started (or started).

[Modification of timing at which medal insertion or settlement is allowed]
FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after winning a replay. FIG. 44 (a) shows that when a normal lip winning has occurred, the game ends without paying out, and thereafter, the process of S8 in FIG. 11 or the process of S1 for the next game, After the processing of S10 to S13 in FIG. 39 is performed, automatic BET processing (S14, S15) is started. That is, since the start of the automatic BET processing (S14, S15) is confirmed after the processing of S10 to S13 in FIG. 39 is performed, it can be said that the automatic BET processing is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), when automatic BET processing is started (or started), the insertion or settlement of medals may be permitted.

  As a first example, for example, when it is determined YES in S12 and the processing of S13 is completed, after performing the same processing as S19 and determining whether the value of the credit counter is 50, The automatic BET processing (the same processing as S14 and S15) is started, and after it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 50, the completion of the automatic BET processing started thereafter is awaited. Instead, credits may be added when medals inserted after the same processing as S21 is detected, and credits may be settled when an operation on the settlement switch 10 is detected. On the other hand, after performing the same process as S19 and determining that the value of the credit counter is 50, the same process as the process after S20 may be performed. In the first example, the rip freeze process may be performed, for example, at the timing when the betting number setting is started.

  As a second example, for example, it is possible to execute an interruption process for inserting or adjusting a medal, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter in the first example is not 50, or the value of the credit counter is After it is determined that it is not 50, the interruption process is allowed to be interrupted every predetermined period (2 msec) between the time when the process corresponding to the first S14 is executed and the start of the game. It is also possible to allow the insertion or settlement of medals when the automatic BET process is started (or started) by executing the insertion process.

  Even in such a case, even if a medal is inserted after the replay winning is generated and before the replay game is started (reel rotation start), the number of bets due to the replay winning In the case of medals detected after the setting (automatic BET) is started, credits can be added according to the detection of the medals. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the credit addition after the replay winning has occurred from being performed prior to the start of the betting number setting. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the replay winning has occurred without causing a sense of incongruity. In addition, the replay function of giving a replay game (1 game) instead of paying out medals is maintained and the significance of the replay is maintained, while credits are accepted according to the settlement operation even after the replay is won. By making the payout possible, it is possible to further improve the convenience of the player after winning the replay.

  FIG. 44B is a diagram for explaining the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after winning the bell lip prize. If a Bellip winning has occurred, the game ends without paying out, and then the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 of FIG. 42 is executed, the rip freeze process shown in FIG. 42 is executed, and the rip freeze is controlled until the rip freeze release condition is satisfied. During this period, as shown in S87 of FIG. 42, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on to permit insertion of a medal for releasing the freeze, and a credit settlement operation or a MAXBET operation for releasing the freeze. Is also allowed. When the rip-freeze release condition is satisfied, the bet number setting is started and the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed as shown in FIG.

  As described above, when a normal lip is won, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), when automatic BET processing is started (or started), medals are allowed to be inserted or settled. When winning, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), a bell lip freeze is generated, and after the freeze release condition is satisfied and the automatic BET process is started (or started), Input or settlement may be allowed. In this case, in order to avoid the simultaneous notification of the bet and the notification that the credit has been added, when an automatic bet process is started (or started), a medal is inserted or Although the settlement is allowed, the notification that the credit is added due to the insertion of the medal may be always performed after the notification that the automatic bet is made. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notification that the credit is added by the medal inserted to release the rip-freeze is also made after the notification that the automatic bet is made. Good.

  Note that even when the timing at which the insertion (credit) is allowed after the replay winning is performed when the automatic bet by the replay winning is started, the timing at which the settlement is allowed after the replay winning is automatically performed by the replay winning. You may make it be the time of completion of BET.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d) and FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the timing at which insertion (credit) / settlement is allowed after the replay winning is achieved. Although an example in which an automatic BET is started or completed by a replay winning has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be a timing at which a predetermined condition is satisfied after the start or completion of an automatic BET by a replay winning. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time elapses, or may be satisfied when a predetermined process ends. As an example in which a predetermined condition is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed after completion of an automatic BET by replay winning, for example, the BET command (with a BET sound) set in S17 of FIG. When the average time required to complete the third BET sound output based on the command is time A, the predetermined condition is established when time A has elapsed since YES is determined in S15. Further, when the average time required for the BET command (no BET sound) set in S18 of FIG. 39 to be output to the sub-control unit 91 and received is time B, The predetermined condition may be satisfied when time B elapses after YES is determined in S15. After determining YES in S15, the process may be shifted to S21 when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the type of replay, the normal replay of the first replay as the specific replay display result that is the specific combination, and the second replay bell lip as the nonspecific replay display result that is the nonspecific combination, and However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of replay is not provided with a non-specific replay display result but only with a specific replay display result. On the contrary, the specific regame display result may not be provided, but only the non-specific regame display result may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the insertion after the replay winning is allowed regardless of the type of the replay. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the insertion after the replay winning is allowed according to the type of the replay. You may comprise. For example, the insertion is not allowed after the first replay winning as the specific replay display result as the specific combination, whereas only after the second replay winning as the nonspecific replay display result as the nonspecific combination. Input may be allowed. In other words, it may be possible to improve the convenience without bothering the player by making it possible to allow the player to insert it only when it is difficult to notice that the re-game display result has been derived.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which settlement after a replay winning is allowed regardless of the type of replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and settlement after a replay winning is permitted depending on the type of replay. You may comprise. For example, after the first replay winning as a specific replay display result that is a specific combination, payment is not allowed, whereas only after the second replay winning as a nonspecific replay display result that is a nonspecific combination Checkout may be allowed. That is, it may be possible to improve the convenience without bothering the player so that the settlement is allowed only when it is difficult to notice that the re-game display result has been derived.

  Then, in the third modification configured as described above, the count of the net increase in medals is configured to end when a predetermined period (for example, 50 games) elapses after the AT ends. Then, when the net increase in medals reaches the prescribed number and the net increase is notified by the notification effect, and thereafter the net increase in medals decreases and the net increase in medals reaches the predetermined number again, the notification effect is executed. Configure to regulate. As a result, the net increase decreases after the AT ends, and the net increase again falls below the specified number, but before the number of games after the end of the AT reaches 50 games, it is controlled again by the AT and the net increase becomes the specified number again. It is possible to prevent the player from being impressed that the number of medals has decreased after the AT has ended.

  In the third modification, when the execution of the specific effect overlaps with the execution of the notification effect, the specific effect is executed without executing the notification effect, and the notification effect is executed when a medal payout occurs thereafter. It is also possible to configure as described above. As a result, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the medals are paid out does not break down, so that the player proceeds with the game so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Can do.

  Further, in the third modification, when the execution of the specific effect overlaps with the execution of the notification effect, the notification effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and then the continuous notification effect when the net increase reaches a predetermined number. It is also possible to configure to execute. As a result, even if the execution time of the specific effect is changed, the flow that the specific effect is executed when the net increase reaches the predetermined number does not break down, so the game proceeds so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. can do.

[Modification 5]
In the modification 5, the case where the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment to the third embodiment is replaced with the pachinko gaming machine 700 will be described.

  First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes an outer frame formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame is a structure that includes a front frame that is openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (except game board 706 described later) attached to them. It is.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 702. On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703, a chance button 7111 is provided that is operated when a specific effect is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). The chance button 7111 corresponds to the effect switch 56 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Selection buttons 112A and 7112B that are operated when selecting various setting items and the like are provided on the front surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703 where the chance buttons 7111 are provided. The selection buttons 7112A and 7112B correspond to the stop switches 8L and 8R at the time of displaying each screen of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for emitting hitting balls (game balls). Is provided. A game board 706 (see FIG. 45) is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down. A large number of nails for guiding a game ball are implanted in the game area 707.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, an effect display device 709 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. In the effect display device 709, a change display (also referred to as a variable display, an update display, or a cyclic display) of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The variation display of the effect symbol is executed in various variations such as scroll display and on-site switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 709, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided. For example, three (left, middle, right) of the effect symbol display area (plural) ) Has a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation control of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display unit 708a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 709 to execute the effect display along with the variation display, and the second special symbol display unit 708a executes the second special display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 708b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 708a that variably displays the first special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of displaying the numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In other words, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, there is a second special symbol display (second variation display means) 708b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 708b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. The first special symbol is subjected to the variable display on the condition that the second special symbol display unit 708b does not execute the variable display of the second special symbol. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed on the condition that the first special symbol display unit 708a does not execute the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed at the same time.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variation display is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 713 or the second start winning opening) 714), the display start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening (a game ball has entered). Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start prize opening 713 may be referred to as a first start prize, and the fact that the game ball has won the second start prize opening 714 will be referred to as a second start prize. There is a case. The data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as reserved storage data that is a right to perform variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 755 of a game control microcomputer 7560 described later. On-hold storage data for the first start winning is stored in the first on-hold storage buffer as first on-hold storage data with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, and on-hold storage data for the second start winning is stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4). Is stored in the second reserved storage buffer as second reserved storage data.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 is provided with a ball hitting device that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 705 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball into the game area 707. It has been. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variable display of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b. The effect design (decoration design) is displayed as a variation design. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the period of variable display is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 708a, the second special symbol display device 708b, and the effect display device 709 described above are variation display devices that perform variation display of identification information and derive and display a display result, and are used as a variation display unit. It is done.

  In the effect display device 709, when the variable display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are variably displayed basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol, and the middle effect symbol). When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of variation display, all the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and the display result is confirmed. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop may be other than the order of the left, right, and center symbols. Further, the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be stopped simultaneously.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

A variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning port 714 (second starting port) through which a game ball can win is located below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. ) 715 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). As described above, the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the second start winning port 714. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 715 is very likely to win the second start winning port 714. The first start winning opening 713 is provided directly below the effect display device 709, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 709 and the first start winning opening 713 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 714 is such that the nails are densely arranged around the area 713 and the arrangement of the nails around the first starting prize opening 713 is difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting prize opening 713. You may make it make higher than the winning rate of the 1st start winning opening 713.

  In the lower part of the first special symbol display 708a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) 4 is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 718a composed of two displays (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 708b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 718b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first reserved memory display unit 718c that displays the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 718d that displays the second reserved memory number. (Each display area is provided). In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, a variable winning ball device 715 that opens and closes only with respect to the second start winning opening 714 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 713 and the second start winning opening 714 are provided. Any of the winning openings 714 may be provided with a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation.

  A reach state may occur during the effect symbol display on the effect display device 709. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the combination of jackpot symbols, the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. Or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols fluctuate synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination of jackpot symbols. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In the present embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design, etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color, etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set such that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high reliability for the big hit. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 45, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball device 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and can be changed between an open state (first state) in which a game ball can be won and a closed state (second state) in which the game ball does not win. It is. Note that the special variable winning ball device 720 may be configured so that in the closed state, it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). Thus, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is difficult to win or does not win the special variable winning ball device 720.

  The special variable winning ball device 720 is a solenoid in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when a specific display result (a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 708a or the second special symbol display unit 708b. When the opening / closing plate is controlled to be in the open state by 721, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected. In this embodiment, the control example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable winning ball is multiple times such as twice in one round. You may make it perform the control which makes the apparatus 720 an open state.

  A normal symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided below the effect display device 709. The normal symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “×”) called normal symbols. When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. In this embodiment, left and right lamps (designs can be visually recognized when lit) are alternately lit to perform variable display. For example, if the left lamp is lit at the end of variable display, it is a win. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol “◯”), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 715 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 714). To change.

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol hold storage display 741 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold memory display 741 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable symbol display on the normal symbol indicator 710 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. There are four upper limit values for the number of ordinary symbols stored, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 lights the display with these four as upper limits.

  Decorative LEDs 725 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 707 of the game board 706, and an outlet 726 into which a hit ball that has not been won is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 727R and 727L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 707. A top frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b, and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 707. For example, the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are related displays in the pseudo-continuous rendering as the repetitive variation pattern (each re-variation period (including the initial variation period) in one variation period). When an effect such that the effect is executed) is executed, blinking control is performed.

  The repeated variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times after a special symbol and an effect symbol change display is started and a display result is derived and displayed, and then a reach effect is executed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as an effect display that changes again, and if it is an effect display that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-variable display such as a notice display is possible. There may be. In the present embodiment, as an example of a repeated variation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo variation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with re-variation as a specific effect display is used. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, as the number of re-variation repeated executions (also referred to as quasi-continuous re-variation times) increases, the reliability that is a big hit (the big hit is for all selection ratios including the big hit and the loss of big hit) The degree of the ratio that is sometimes selected, the ratio of the jackpot, that is, the reliability of the jackpot) increases. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 709 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo continuous chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. Further, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, some reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Also, a prize ball LED 751 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 728b, and a ball cut LED 752 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 728c. . The top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, the right frame LED 728c, and the decoration LED 725 are an example of a light emitter for performance provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed. In addition, a prepaid card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. As shown in FIG. 33 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 46, a game control microcomputer 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731. The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O 757. In this embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are built in the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be externally attached or incorporated. Further, the I / O 757 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 754. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data according to a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 7503 includes a numerical data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule. It has various functions such as a selection switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of a game control microcomputer 7560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 7560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as a ROM 754. The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 7503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 713a or the second start port switch 714a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and effect symbol Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot display result. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 (special symbol process flag, value of each reserved memory number counter, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. Saved in. The data according to the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. is there. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 755 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. A reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like is output during a period in which the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer in which the reset signal is at a low level. The operation stop signal for stopping the operation such as 7560 is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). In addition, a clear signal indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  Further, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, the general winning port switch 711, and the recovery path sensor 712 to the game control microcomputer 7560. 758 is also mounted on the main board 731. When the main board 731 receives the detection signals from the various switches, the main board 731 sends out a prize ball signal for executing a prize ball payout according to the various switches to the payout control board 737. When the payout control board 737 receives the prize ball signal, it drives the ball payout device 797 to pay out the prize ball according to the prize ball signal.

  The general winning opening switch 711 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 706 and detects, for example, a game ball that has entered a general winning opening (not shown) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. Switch. Based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning opening switch 711, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. The collection passage sensor 712 is a transmissive optical sensor that is installed at a predetermined position in a common passage through which all game balls collected by the pachinko gaming machine 700 pass and detects the passage of the game balls.

  An output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 720 forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 731. Further, an information output circuit for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 731.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 directs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777. The control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 709 that displays the effect symbol in a variable manner is performed.

  In the present embodiment, an operation signal from the chance button 7111 is input to the effect control board 780, and an effect and a determination operation on each screen or the like are executed according to the operation signal from the chance button 7111.

  In the present embodiment, operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B are input to the effect control board 780, and a selection operation on each screen or the like is executed in accordance with the operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer including an effect control CPU and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM, and a capture signal (effect control INT signal) from the main board 731 input via the relay board 777. ), The presentation control command is received via the input driver and the input port. Further, the effect control CPU causes the VDP (video display processor) to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In the present embodiment, a VDP that performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer, and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP then outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU reads necessary data from the character ROM in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP. The VDP executes display control based on data input from the effect control CPU. The production control CPU executes the production and the determination of selection items on each screen and the like in accordance with the operation signal input from the chance button 7111. The effect control CPU selects a selection item on each screen or the like in accordance with an operation signal input from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function for monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit. The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to an input driver (not shown) on the effect control board 780. The input driver allows the signal input from the relay board 777 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 780 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means. Further, the effect control CPU outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 via an output port (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU outputs sound number data to the audio output board 770 via the output port.

  In the lamp driver board 735, a signal for driving the LED is input to an LED driver (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 735.

  In the voice output board 770, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 727R and 727L an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a changing period of the effect design).

  In the pachinko machine 700 configured as described above, when a game ball wins a big winning opening during the big hit gaming state, the fact is notified. Further, a net increase obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired from the number of game balls paid out is counted together with the start of the jackpot gaming state. When the net increase reaches a specified number (for example, 1000, 2500, 5000, or 10,000) during the jackpot game state, the net increase is specified without notifying that the game ball has won a prize. Notify that the number has been reached.

  When the net increase reaches the specified number, it will be accompanied by a prize at the big prize opening, so by notifying the player that the net increase has reached the specified number, the player will be able to increase the net increase. At the same time, it is possible to recognize that a game ball has won a prize opening. In addition, it is possible to make a more impressive impression that the net increase has reached the specified number by effectively notifying only that the net increase has reached the specified number.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 700 as described above, when a game ball wins a big winning opening during the big hit gaming state, the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R and 727L notify that fact. In addition, when the net increase reaches the specified number during the jackpot gaming state, the speakers 727R and 727L notify that the game ball has won the winning prize opening, and the effect display device indicates that the net increase has reached the specified number. 709.

  Thereby, even when notifying each of the winning at the special winning opening and the fact that the net increase has reached the prescribed number, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 700 as described above, when a specific jackpot is won, the probability that the jackpot occurrence probability is higher than the normal gaming state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. . In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific round of the jackpot gaming state or during the jackpot gaming state, it is configured to notify whether the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. And when notifying only that when a game ball wins a big winning opening in the big hit game state, it notifies by the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R and 727L. Further, when notifying only whether or not the probability fluctuation state is controlled, the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R and 727L are informed. In addition, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening during the jackpot gaming state, a notification to that effect is given. The effect is displayed by the speakers 727R and 727L, and the effect display device 709 notifies whether or not the probability fluctuation state is controlled.

  Thereby, even when notifying each of the winning at the special winning opening and the fact that the state is controlled to the probability variation state, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

[Effects of First to Third Embodiments and Modifications 1 to 4]
In the first embodiment, notifying that a payout has occurred, and when the net increase reaches a specified number when the payout occurs, the net increase is set to the specified number without notifying that a payout has occurred. It is notified that this has been reached (the part that performs the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, when the net increase reaches the specified number, a payout also accompanies, so by notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number, the player has paid out in conjunction with the net increase reaching the specified number. Can be recognized at the same time. In addition, it is possible to make a more impressive impression that the net increase has reached the specified number by effectively notifying only that the net increase has reached the specified number.

In the first embodiment, the first event is that the medal is paid out, and the second event is that the net increase reaches the specified number (the portion for determining Sq1 and Sq3 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, it is possible to make a more impressive impression of reaching the specified number of net increases related to the medal payout that is advantageous to the player.

In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number (the portion for performing the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase does not reach the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred (the process of Ss5 in FIG. 23). When the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 informs that the net increase has reached the specified number, and also indicates that the payout has occurred by the speakers 53 and 54. Notification is made (the part that performs the process of Ss4 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, even when notifying that each of different events has occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number (part of performing Ss4 in FIG. 23). ).
Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the specified number.

In the second embodiment, the first event is that a medal is paid out, and the second event is that the net increase reaches a specified number (the portion for determining Ss1 and Ss3 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, even when notifying that different events related to the payout of medals advantageous to the player have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

In the third embodiment, when a payout occurs and the number of AT games is not increased, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred (part of performing the process of St5 in FIG. 26). ) When no payout occurs and the number of AT games is added, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the number of AT games has been added (the portion for performing the processing of St7 in FIG. 26). When the number of AT games is increased and the number of AT games is increased, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the number of AT games has been increased and notifies that the payout has occurred by the speakers 53 and 54 (St4 in FIG. 26). Processing part).
Therefore, even when notifying that each of different events has occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

In the third embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the liquid crystal display 51 of the addition of the number of AT games, which has a higher priority of notification to the player than the occurrence of payout (part of performing the process of St4 in FIG. 26).
Therefore, it can be more impressed that the number of AT games is increased.

In the first modification, when the number of games after the end of the AT reaches 50 games, the net increase that has been counted up to that point is cleared, and the notification effect is performed again for the specified number once the notification effect is performed. This is restricted (in this example, the process of Sh6 is not performed when Y is Sh4 in FIG. 28).
Therefore, for example, the net increase decreases after the AT ends, and the net increase is less than the specified number, but before the number of games after the end of AT reaches 50 games, it is controlled again by the AT and the net increase becomes the specified number again. It is possible to prevent the player from being impressed that the number of medals has decreased after the AT has ended.

In the first modified example, when the execution of the continuation effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the continuation effect is executed without executing the notification effect, the payout occurs again, and the net increase reaches the specified number. (In this example, when Sh5 in FIG. 28 is Y, Sh6 processing is not performed, and when Sh5 is N, Sh6 processing is performed).
Therefore, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the medals are paid out does not collapse, so that the player can proceed with the game so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. it can.

In the second modification, when the execution of the additional effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the notification effect is executed without executing the additional effect, and it is added again when the additional condition is established and the additional lottery is performed. The effect is executed (in this example, the part for determining Sr5 in FIG. 31).
Therefore, even if the execution time of the extra effect is changed, the flow that the extra effect is executed when the extra condition is satisfied does not break down, so that the game can proceed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. .

In the third modification, a continuous effect of an effect pattern that is changed from the number notification effect 502 for notifying the predetermined number to the additional notification effect 504 and 506 for notifying the number of added games is executed as the continuous winning notification effect (in this example, FIG. 38 (B) and FIG. 38 (C)).
Therefore, since it becomes easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the number of acquired medals and the number of added games than a slot machine that does not notify the number of added games with an effect pattern that changes from the number notification effect to the continuous winning notification effect. It is possible to effectively notify that the AT has been won by the fact that the number of medals acquired since the start has reached a predetermined number.

In the fourth modification, after the re-game display result is derived, the re-game derivation update unit updates the bet number stored in the bet number storage unit and the next game can be started before the game medium can be started. When the game medium is detected by the detection means, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated (in this example, S40 in FIG. 40. In addition to the processing of S10 to S12 in FIG. 39, Further, after the bet number setting is completed and after it is determined that credit is possible in S19, the process is executed after S21 (see FIG. 43C).
Therefore, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is detected after the bet number is updated by the re-game deriving update means and the next game can be started. By being a medium, the game value can be updated in accordance with the game medium. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the betting amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, after the re-game display result is derived, delay control is performed, and the game medium is inserted, and the detection result by the game medium detection means becomes the release result, so that the delay control is released. As a result, even when the bet number is updated by deriving the replay display result for the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem that the next game can be started.

In the modified example 4, after the re-game display result is derived, the game medium detecting unit starts updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage unit by the re-game deriving update unit. When the game medium is detected, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated (in this example, refer to FIG. 44, in the modification example [permitted / settlement timing after replay winning) ] (See (a)))).
Therefore, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is the game medium detected after the update of the betting number by the re-game deriving update means is started, The game value can be updated according to the game medium. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the betting amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, after the re-game display result is derived, delay control is performed, and the game medium is inserted, and the detection result by the game medium detection means becomes the release result, so that the delay control is released. As a result, even when the bet number is updated by deriving the replay display result for the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem that the next game can be started.

In the above-mentioned modified example 4, when a re-game winning (replay in this example, first to second replay) is generated (in this example, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the gaming value is increased. The betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated so that the next game can be started without using it (in this example, S14 and S15 in FIGS. 39 to 41).
According to this feature, the next game can be started without using the game value by generating a re-game winning.

  [Invention included in the above embodiment]

[Invention included in the first embodiment]
As a technique related to the first embodiment, for example, the winning probability of replay is increased and the winning probability of bonus or small role is controlled to the replay time set to the same probability as the normal time, and the player at the replay time is controlled. There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (a net increase) obtained by (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 (for example, paragraph [0070]). Further, for example, a slot machine is known that displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small role is won at a replay time that ends when a certain number of medals are paid out (for example, JP 2009-5971 A). (For example, see paragraph [0225], paragraph [0331], etc.)).

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-5971, when a medal is paid out, a medal payout number is notified by notifying the number of paid-out medals and the net increase number. It is also informing that this event has occurred. Then, if the occurrence of one event satisfies the predetermined condition and another event different from the one event occurs, the player will be notified if each event is separately reported. Since it is difficult to recognize each notification at the same time, there is a possibility that the player's recognition for the notification may be hindered.

  The invention included in the first embodiment has been made by paying attention to such a problem. Even when another event occurs due to the accumulation of one event, one event has occurred. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing this and further impressing that another event has occurred.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the invention included in the first embodiment is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment),
The first event (for example, the payout of medals in the first embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the first embodiment, winning a small role), and the occurrence of the first event is accumulated. And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the first embodiment, the net increase in medals reaches a specified number) can occur,
A first notification effect executing means for executing a first notification effect for notifying that the first event has occurred (for example, in the first embodiment, the portion performing the process of Sq5 in FIG. 21);

A second notification effect executing means for executing a second notification effect for notifying that the second event has occurred (for example, in the first embodiment, the portion performing the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21);
When the first event occurs and the second event also occurs, the gaming machine does not execute the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit, but performs the second notification effect by the second notification effect execution unit. (For example, in the first embodiment, the part that performs the process of Sq4 when Y is Sq3 in FIG. 21)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the second event occurs, the occurrence of the first event also accompanies. Therefore, by notifying that the second event has occurred by executing the second notification effect, the player is notified of the second event. The occurrence of the first event can be recognized simultaneously with the occurrence. Moreover, it can be made more impressive that the second event has occurred by notifying only that the second event has occurred efficiently.

[Inventions included in the second and third embodiments]

  As a technique related to the second embodiment and the third embodiment, for example, the replay winning probability is increased, and the winning probability of bonuses and small roles is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as in normal times, and replay is performed. There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (a net increase) obtained by a player in time (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 (for example, paragraph [0070]). Further, for example, a slot machine is known that displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small role is won at a replay time that ends when a certain number of medals are paid out (for example, JP 2009-5971 A). (For example, see paragraph [0225], paragraph [0331], etc.)).

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-5971, when a medal is paid out, a medal payout number is notified by notifying the number of medals paid out or a net increase number. It is also informing that this event has occurred. Then, in a gaming machine that notifies that one event has occurred, when it is also notified that another event that is different from the one event has occurred, a different event may occur at the same timing. In this case, if the notification method is not considered, one notification may interfere with other notifications.

  The inventions included in the second embodiment and the third embodiment are made by paying attention to such a problem, and even when notifying that each of the different events has occurred, one notification is another notification. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can notify at the same timing without hindering the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the invention included in the second embodiment is:
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, slot machine 1 in the second embodiment),
A first event that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the second embodiment, a prize for a small role) (for example, a payout of medals in the second embodiment) and occurs with the occurrence of the first event And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the second embodiment, the net increase in medals reaches a specified number) can occur,
First notification effect executing means (for example, in the second embodiment) capable of executing a first notification effect (for example, medal acquisition sound in the second embodiment) for notifying that the first event or the second event has occurred. Speakers 53, 54),
Second notification effect executing means (for example, second display effect) capable of executing the second notification effect (for example, the acquired number display and the specified number arrival display in the second embodiment) for notifying that the first event or the second event has occurred. In a second embodiment, a liquid crystal display 51),
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification effect executing means executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution means executes the second notification effect. (For example, in the second embodiment, when Ss1 in FIG. 23 is Y and Ss3 is N, the process of Ss5 is performed)
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution means, and the other occurrence is notified by the second notification effect execution means. Announcement is made by execution of the effect (for example, in the second embodiment, when Ss1 in FIG. 23 is Y and Ss3 is Y, the process of Ss4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when notifying that each of different events has occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the invention included in the third embodiment is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the slot machine 1 in the third embodiment),
Regardless of the occurrence of the first event (for example, payout of medals in the third embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the third embodiment, a prize for a small role) and the occurrence of the first event And a second event that is different from the first event (for example, the addition of the number of AT games in the third embodiment) can occur,
First notification effect execution means (for example, a medal acquisition sound and an AT game number added sound in the third embodiment) for notifying that the first event or the second event has occurred (for example, in the third embodiment) In the third embodiment, the speakers 53, 54)
Second notification effect execution means (for example, in the third embodiment, which can display the acquired number display and the AT game number addition display) that can notify that the first event or the second event has occurred (for example, in the third embodiment) In a third embodiment, a liquid crystal display 51),
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification effect executing means executes the first notification effect and the second notification effect execution means executes the second notification effect. (For example, in the third embodiment, when Y is St2 in FIG. 26 and N is St3 in FIG. 26, the process of St5 is executed)
When the second event has occurred and the first event has not occurred, the second notification effect is executed by the first notification effect executing means and the second notification effect executing means by the second notification effect executing means. (For example, in the third embodiment, when N is St2 in FIG. 26 and Y is St6 in FIG. 26, the process of St5 is executed)
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution means, and the other occurrence is notified by the second notification effect execution means. Notification is made by the execution of the effect (for example, in the third embodiment, when St2 in FIG. 26 is Y and St3 is Y, the process of St4 is executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when notifying that each of different events has occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without interfering with other notifications.

  [Modification of First Embodiment]

[About the first event and the second event]
In the first embodiment, the first event is the payout of medals at the AT, and the second event is that the net increase reaches the specified number at the AT. For example, the first event is added to the AT and the number of games is given And the second event is added and the number of games reaches the specified number of games, or the first event is set to digest the game and the second event is set to reach the specified number of games, or The mode of the first event and the second event may be different from the above-described embodiment, for example, the first event may be an error occurrence, and the second event may be the specified number of error occurrences.

[About notification]
In the first embodiment, the first event and the second event are notified by the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 and the effect LED 52 are provided. A back lamp (for example, a reel LED 55) disposed on the back side (inside) of the reel, a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen) disposed on the front side of the reel, and a front door 1st event by means different from the first embodiment, such as lamps and LEDs attached to 1b etc. (for example, effect effect LED 52), vibration of stop switch, ventilation from around stop switch, change in temperature of stop switch, etc. Further, the second event may be notified. Further, the notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having other functions (for example, when the reel LED 55 is used to produce an effect, the reel LED 55 is connected to the rear side of the reel). It is also possible to provide a device for performing only the notification.

  [Modification of Second Embodiment]

[About the first event and the second event]
In the second embodiment, the first event is the payout of medals at the AT, and the second event is that the net increase reaches the specified number at the AT. For example, the first event is added to the AT and the number of games is given And the second event is added and the number of games reaches the specified number of games, or the first event is set to digest the game and the second event is set to reach the specified number of games, or The first event and the second event form the second event with the occurrence of the first event, such that the first event is the occurrence of an error and the second event is the number of times the error has occurred. As long as this occurs, the embodiment may be different from the above embodiment.

[About notification]
In the second embodiment, the example in which the first event and the second event are notified by the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect effect LED 52 and the rear side of the reel It is attached to a back lamp (for example, a reel LED 55) disposed on the inner side, a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen), a front door 1b, etc. The first event and the second event are different from those in the second embodiment, such as lamps and LEDs (for example, production effect LED 52), stop switch vibration, air blow from the stop switch, and change in the temperature of the stop switch. Notification may be performed. Further, the notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having other functions (for example, when the reel LED 55 is used to produce an effect, the reel LED 55 is connected to the rear side of the reel). It is also possible to provide a device for performing only the notification. For example, the notification of the first event and the notification of the second event may be performed by different types of devices, or may be performed by a plurality of the same types of devices.

  [Modification of Third Embodiment]

[About the first event and the second event]
In the third embodiment, the first event is a payout of medals at the AT, and the second event is an AT additional game number. For example, the first event is an AT additional game number, 2 events have a net increase in medals, or the first event is game digestion, the 2nd event is AT and the number of games is given, or the 1st event is an error If the second event is not related to the first event and the second event, the first event and the second event may be different from the above embodiment.

[About notification]
In the third embodiment, the first event and the second event are notified by the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect effect LED 52, the rear side of the reel It is attached to a back lamp (for example, a reel LED 55) disposed on the inner side, a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen), a front door 1b, etc. The first event and the second event are different from those in the third embodiment, such as lamps and LEDs (for example, production effect LED 52), vibration of the stop switch, ventilation from the periphery of the stop switch, and change in the temperature of the stop switch. Notification may be performed. Further, the notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having other functions (for example, when the reel LED 55 is used to produce an effect, the reel LED 55 is connected to the rear side of the reel). It is also possible to provide a device for performing only the notification. For example, the notification of the first event and the notification of the second event may be performed by different types of devices, or may be performed by a plurality of the same types of devices.

[About gaming machines]
In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the bet number using medals and credits has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, using a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine. The invention according to claim 1 is realized by applying the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a slot machine for setting a bet number or a fully credit type slot machine for setting a bet number using only credits. It is possible. When game balls are used as game media, for example, when one medal corresponds to five game balls, and 3 is set as the bet number in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls, and the medals and game balls are paid out when winning is shown in the above embodiment. The present invention can be realized by applying the configuration.

  Further, the present invention includes a home game machine and other computer devices for starting game software (slot machine game, pachinko gaming machine game), and a portable terminal for starting installed mobile applications (slot machine application, pachinko gaming machine application). It is also possible to configure as a gaming machine.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 41 main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A first event that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a second event that is different from the first event can occur by accumulating the occurrence of the first event,
First notification effect executing means for executing a first notification effect for notifying that the first event has occurred;
A second notification effect executing means for executing a second notification effect for notifying that the second event has occurred;
When the first event occurs and the second event also occurs, the gaming machine does not execute the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit, but performs the second notification effect by the second notification effect execution unit. A gaming machine characterized by that. Game medium detection means for detecting the inserted game medium;
Game value storage means for storing a game value that can be used to set a bet amount in accordance with a betting operation;
Bet number storage means for storing the bet number set for one game;
At the time of game medium detection in which one of the bet number stored in the bet number storage means and the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated according to the detection result by the game medium detection means Update means;
Re-game derivation update means for updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means so that the next game can be started without using the game value when a re-game winning is generated. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising:

Images